5500225X 1 ENG 2007-05 Cont-Tech Unidrive SP

EF
www.controltechniques.com
Short Form Guide

Guide abrégé
Kurzhandbuch
Guida rapida
Guía rápida
Maillefer Doc.
0471-0033-02
550 0225X.1
Introduction / Einführung / Introduzione / Introducción
The multilingual Unidrive SP Short Form Guide is a short form manual designed as a concise aid to
drive installation and operation. The manual is presented in five languages, with a section
dedicated to each. These are supported by a multilingual international section sharing common
reference information. The majority of look up tables and illustrations are found in this section
including Advanced parameter information in the form of logic diagrams.
More information including the Unidrive SP User Guide and Unidrive SP Advanced User Guide can
be found on the CD supplied with the drive.
Le guide abrégé multilingue Unidrive SP est un manuel simplifié conçu comme une aide sommaire
pour l'installation et le fonctionnement du variateur. Le manuel est présenté en cinq langues, avec
une section dédiée à chacune d'elles. Celles-ci sont documentées par une section internationale
multilingue partageant des informations de référence commune. La majorité des tables de
recherche et des illustrations se trouvent dans cette section, y compris les informations sur les
paramètres avancés sous forme de diagrammes logiques.
De plus amples informations, y compris le Guide d'utilisation Unidrive SP et le Guide d'utilisation
avancé Unidrive SP se trouvent dans le CD fourni avec le variateur.
Das mehrsprachige Unidrive SP Kurzhandbuch ist als kurzes Nachschlagewerk für die Installation
und Bedienung gedacht. Das komplette Handbuch wird in fünf Sprachen mit separaten
Abschnitten unterteilt. Diese werden von einem mehrsprachigen internationalen Abschnitt mit
allgemeinen Informationen unterstützt. Die Mehrzahl an Nachschlagetabellen und Abbildungen ist
in diesem Abschnitt vorhanden einschließlich der erweiterten Parameterinformationen in Form von
Logikdiagrammen.
Weitere Informationen, einschließlich der Betriebsanleitung Unidrive SP und der Erweiterten
Betriebsanleitung Unidrive SP sind auf der dem Gerät beiliegenden CD zu finden.
La Guida rapida dell'Unidrive SP multilingue è una versione concisa di manuale redatta come
ausilio all'installazione e al funzionamento. Il presente manuale è presentato in cinque lingue, con
una sezione dedicata a ciascuna di esse. Tali sezioni sono supportate da un capitolo internazionale
multilingue in cui sono raccolte informazioni comuni di riferimento. La maggior parte delle tabelle di
consultazione e delle illustrazioni è contenuta in questa sezione, nella quale si trovano inoltre le
informazioni sui Parametri avanzati sotto forma di diagrammi logici.
Ulteriori informazioni, comprendenti la Guida Unidrive SP dell'utente e la Guida Unidrive SP
dell'utente per uso avanzato, sono riportate nel CD fornito con il convertitore.
La Guía rápida del Unidrive SP es un manual multilingüe en formato reducido cuyo objetivo es
proporcionar directrices breves que faciliten la instalación y el funcionamiento. El manual incluye
cinco idiomas y dedica una sección a cada uno de ellos. Asimismo, contiene una sección
multilingüe con información de referencia común en la que se incluyen la mayoría de las tablas e
ilustraciones, como los diagramas lógicos con información sobre los parámetros avanzados.
En el CD suministrado con el accionamiento puede encontrar más información, incluida la Guía del
usuario del Unidrive SP y la Guía del usuario avanzado del Unidrive SP.
Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1

English
English
General Information
The manufacturer accepts no liability for any consequences resulting from inappropriate, negligent
or incorrect installation or adjustment of the optional operating parameters of the equipment or from
mismatching the variable speed drive with the motor.
The contents of this guide are believed to be correct at the time of printing. In the interests of a
commitment to a policy of continuous development and improvement, the manufacturer reserves the
right to change the specification of the product or its performance, or the contents of the guide,
Français Deutsch
without notice.
All rights reserved. No parts of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electrical or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by an information storage or
retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publisher.
Drive software version
This product is supplied with the latest version of software. If this product is to be used in a new or
existing system with other drives, there may be some differences between their software and the
software in this product. These differences may cause this product to function differently. This may
also apply to drives returned from a Control Techniques Service Centre.
The software version of the drive can be checked by looking at Pr 11.29 (or Pr 0.50) and Pr 11.34.
The software version takes the form of zz.yy.xx, where Pr 11.29 displays zz.yy and Pr 11.34 displays
xx, i.e. for software version 01.01.00, Pr 11.29 would display 1.01 and Pr 11.34 would display 0.
If there is any doubt, contact a Control Techniques Drive Centre.
Environmental statement
Control Techniques is committed to minimising the environmental impacts of its manufacturing
operations and of its products throughout their life cycle. To this end, we operate an Environmental
Italiano
Management System (EMS) which is certified to the International Standard ISO 14001. Further
information on the EMS, our Environmental Policy and other relevant information is available on
request, or can be found at www.greendrives.com.
The electronic variable-speed drives manufactured by Control Techniques have the potential to save
energy and (through increased machine/process efficiency) reduce raw material consumption and
scrap throughout their long working lifetime. In typical applications, these positive environmental
effects far outweigh the negative impacts of product manufacture and end-of-life disposal.
Nevertheless, when the products eventually reach the end of their useful life, they can very easily be
dismantled into their major component parts for efficient recycling. Many parts snap together and can Español International
be separated without the use of tools, while other parts are secured with conventional screws.
Virtually all parts of the product are suitable for recycling.
Product packaging is of good quality and can be re-used. Large products are packed in wooden
crates, while smaller products come in strong cardboard cartons which themselves have a high
recycled fibre content. If not re-used, these containers can be recycled. Polythene, used on the
protective film and bags for wrapping product, can be recycled in the same way. Control Techniques'
packaging strategy favours easily-recyclable materials of low environmental impact, and regular
reviews identify opportunities for improvement.
When preparing to recycle or dispose of any product or packaging, please observe local legislation
and best practice.
Copyright © May 2007 Control Techniques Drives Limited

Issue Number: 2
Software: 01.13.01 onwards
Contents
English
1 Safety Information ....................................................................................... 5

2 Product Information .................................................................................... 7
2.1 Nameplate description .............................................................................................7
2.2 Options / Accessories ..............................................................................................8
3 Mechanical Installation ............................................................................. 10
3.1 Mounting methods ..................................................................................................10
3.2 Enclosure ...............................................................................................................11
3.3 EMC filters ..............................................................................................................12
Français Deutsch
4 Electrical Installation ................................................................................ 13

4.1 Ratings ...................................................................................................................14
4.2 Power connections .................................................................................................14
4.3 Encoder connections ..............................................................................................15
4.4 Serial communications connections .......................................................................15
4.5 Screen connections ................................................................................................15
4.6 Control connections ...............................................................................................17
5 Getting Started .......................................................................................... 18
5.1 Understanding the display ......................................................................................18
5.2 Keypad operation ...................................................................................................19
5.3 Menu 0 ...................................................................................................................20
5.4 Menu structure .......................................................................................................20
5.5 Advanced menus ...................................................................................................22
5.6 Changing the operating mode ................................................................................23
5.7 Saving parameters .................................................................................................24
5.8 Restoring parameter defaults .................................................................................24
5.9 Displaying parameters with non-default values only ..............................................25
5.10 Displaying destination parameters only .................................................................25
5.11 Parameter access level and security .....................................................................25
6 Basic parameters (Menu 0) ....................................................................... 28
Italiano
7 Running the motor .................................................................................... 32

7.1 Quick start Connections .........................................................................................32
7.2 Quick Start commissioning .....................................................................................36
8 Advanced parameters ............................................................................... 44
9 Diagnostics ................................................................................................ 45
9.1 Indicaciones de alarma ........................................................................................281
9.2 Indicaciones de estado ........................................................................................282
10 Multingual Appendix ............................................................................... 283
Español International
11 UL Listing Information ............................................................................ 349
Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 Unidrive SP Short Form Guide

www.controltechniques.com Issue Number: 2
Safety Product Mechanical Electrical Getting Running Advanced UL Listing
Menu 0 Diagnostics Appendix
Information Information Installation Installation Started the motor parameters Information
1 Safety Information
English
Warnings, Cautions and Notes
A Warning contains information which is essential for avoiding a safety hazard.

WARNING
Français Deutsch
A Caution contains information which is necessary for avoiding a risk of damage to the
product or other equipment.
CAUTION
NOTE A Note contains information, which helps to ensure correct operation of the product.
Electrical safety - general warning

The voltages used in the drive can cause severe electrical shock and/or burns, and
could be lethal. Extreme care is necessary at all times when working with or adjacent to
the drive.
Specific warnings are given at the relevant places in this User Guide.
System design and safety of personnel

The drive is intended as a component for professional incorporation into complete
equipment or a system. If installed incorrectly, the drive may present a safety hazard.
The drive uses high voltages and currents, carries a high level of stored electrical
Italiano
energy, and is used to control equipment which can cause injury.
Close attention is required to the electrical installation and the system design to avoid
hazards either in normal operation or in the event of equipment malfunction. System
design, installation, commissioning and maintenance must be carried out by personnel
who have the necessary training and experience. They must read this safety information
and this User Guide carefully.
The STOP and SECURE DISABLE functions of the drive do not isolate dangerous
voltages from the output of the drive or from any external option unit. The supply must Español International
be disconnected by an approved electrical isolation device before gaining access to the
electrical connections.
With the sole exception of the SECURE DISABLE function, none of the drive
functions must be used to ensure safety of personnel, i.e. they must not be used
for safety-related functions.
Careful consideration must be given to the functions of the drive which might result in a
hazard, either through their intended behaviour or through incorrect operation due to a
fault. In any application where a malfunction of the drive or its control system could lead
to or allow damage, loss or injury, a risk analysis must be carried out, and where
necessary, further measures taken to reduce the risk - for example, an over-speed
protection device in case of failure of the speed control, or a fail-safe mechanical brake
in case of loss of motor braking.
The SECURE DISABLE function has been approved1 as meeting the requirements of
EN954-1 category 3 for the prevention of unexpected starting of the drive. It may be
Unidrive SP Short Form Guide Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 5

Issue Number: 2 www.controltechniques.com
used in a safety-related application. The system designer is responsible for

English
ensuring that the complete system is safe and designed correctly according to
the relevant safety standards.
1
Independent approval by BGIA has been given.
Environmental limits
Instructions in this User Guide regarding transport, storage, installation and use of the
drive must be complied with, including the specified environmental limits. Drives must
not be subjected to excessive physical force.
Français Deutsch
Compliance with regulations

The installer is responsible for complying with all relevant regulations, such as national
wiring regulations, accident prevention regulations and electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) regulations. Particular attention must be given to the cross-sectional areas of
conductors, the selection of fuses or other protection, and protective earth (ground)
connections.
This User Guide contains instruction for achieving compliance with specific EMC
standards.
Within the European Union, all machinery in which this product is used must comply
with the following directives:
98/37/EC: Safety of machinery.
89/336/EEC: Electromagnetic Compatibility.
Motor
Ensure the motor is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Ensure the motor shaft is not exposed.
Italiano
Standard squirrel cage induction motors are designed for single speed operation. If it is
intended to use the capability of the drive to run a motor at speeds above its designed
maximum, it is strongly recommended that the manufacturer is consulted first.
Low speeds may cause the motor to overheat because the cooling fan becomes less
effective. The motor should be fitted with a protection thermistor. If necessary, an
electric forced vent fan should be used.
The values of the motor parameters set in the drive affect the protection of the motor.
The default values in the drive should not be relied upon.
It is essential that the correct value is entered in parameter 0.46 motor rated current.
This affects the thermal protection of the motor.
Adjusting parameters
Some parameters have a profound effect on the operation of the drive. They must not
be altered without careful consideration of the impact on the controlled system.
Measures must be taken to prevent unwanted changes due to error or tampering.
6 Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 Unidrive SP Short Form Guide

2 Product Information
English
2.1 Nameplate description
Figure 2-1 Typical drive rating labels
Rating label (size 1 to 6)
Input voltage Input No. of Typical input

rating frequency phases current for
Normal Duty
I/P 200-240V 50-60Hz 3ph 6.6A rating
Model SP1201 S.No: 3000005001
Français Deutsch
O/P 0-240V SP 1,5 TL 4.3 / 5.2A Serial
number
Output voltage Heavy Duty / Normal Duty
range rating output current
Approvals label (Size 1 to 6)
Model
Heavy Duty /
Please read manual before connecting. Normal Duty
SP1201 0.75 / 1.1kW power rating
Electric Shock Risk: Wait 10 min between
disconnecting supply & removing covers
IND.
CONT. C UL US
R Approvals
SP 1,5 TL EQ. LISTED8D14N1652
Ser No: 3000005001 Made In U.K

Serial
number STDL25
Customer and
date code
Power stage label (Size 5 and 6 only)
Heavy Duty /
Model
Normal Duty Customer and
power rating date code
SP5402 75 / 90kW STDN39
Italiano
Please read manual before connecting.
Electric Shock Risk: Wait 10 min between
disconnecting supply & removing covers
Input voltage I/P 380-480V 50-60Hz 3ph 152.0A
Output voltage O/P 0-480V 156 / 168A C UL R US Approvals
Ser No: 3000005001 SP 100 T LISTED8D14 E171230
Serial
number Made In U.K
Input Heavy Duty / No. of phases &

frequency Normal Duty Typical input current for
rating output current Normal Duty rating
Model number
Key to approvals
SP 6 4 0 1 CE approval Europe
C Tick approval Australia
Unidrive product line USA &
SP: Solutions Platform UL / cUL approval
Complete inverter drive
R
Canada
SP frame size
Voltage rating
0: Voltage independent
2: 200V to 240V
4: 380V to 480V
5: 500V to 575V
6: 500V to 690V
Configuration
0: Wall mount drive
1: Free standing cubicle drive
2: Wall mount, no dynamic brake control
3: Free standing cubicle, no dynamic brake control
Current rating step
See section 10.2 on page 288 for location of rating labels.

Output current
English
The continuous output current ratings given on the rating label are for maximum 40°C
(104°F), 1000m altitude and 3.0 kHz switching. Derating is required for higher switching
frequencies, ambient temperatures >40°C (104°F) and higher altitude. For derating
information, refer to the Unidrive SP User Guide on the CD supplied with the drive.
Input current
The input current is affected by the supply voltage and impedance. The input current
given on the rating label is the typical input current and is stated for a balanced supply.
2.2 Options / Accessories
Français Deutsch
Figure 2-2
SMARTCARD*
Keypad 15-way D-type

Internal braking SM-Keypad converter
resistor (size 0 SM-Keypad Plus
to 2 only)
SM slot 1
SM slot 2
SM slot 3
Feedback Automation
SM-Universal Encoder Plus (I/O Expansion)
Italiano
SM-Resolver SM-I/O Plus

SM-Encoder Plus SM-I/O Lite
SM-I/O Timer
CT Comms Fieldbus SM-I/O PELV
cable SM-PROFIBUS-DP SM-I/O 120V
SM-DeviceNet SM-I/O 24V Protected
External SM-INTERBUS
footprint / SM-CAN (Applications)
bookcase SM-CANopen SM-Applications
EMC filter SM-SERCOS SM-Applications Lite
SM-Ethernet SM-EZMotion
SM-Applications Plus
SLM
SM-SLM
* Part supplied with drive.

Table 2-1 Parts supplied with the drive
English
Description Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6
Control
connectors
Relay
connector
UL warning CAUTION
Risk of Electric Shock
label Power down unit 10minutes
before removing cover
Français Deutsch
Grounding
bracket
Through panel
mounting
gasket
Through panel
mounting
bracket
Surface
mounting
brackets
Top surface
mounting
brackets
Nylon M8
washers M6 M6 M6 M6
Italiano
Sealing clips
Fixing
screws M8x20
Grounding
clamp
Ground
cable bridge Español International
DC terminal
cover
grommets
Ferrite ring
Supply and
motor
connector
Ground fixing
screws M6x12
Fan supply
connector
IP54 gasket
IP54 insert

3 Mechanical Installation
English
Safety information
Follow the instructions
The mechanical and electrical installation instructions must be adhered to. Any
questions or doubt should be referred to the supplier of the equipment. It is the
WARNING responsibility of the owner or user to ensure that the installation of the drive and any
external option unit, and the way in which they are operated and maintained, comply with
Français Deutsch
the requirements of the Health and Safety at Work Act in the United Kingdom or
applicable legislation and regulations and codes of practice in the country in which the
equipment is used.
Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a potentially lethal voltage after
the AC supply has been disconnected. If the drive has been energised, the AC supply
WARNING must be isolated at least ten minutes before work may continue.
Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal resistor. Under certain, unusual
fault conditions, it is possible that the capacitors may fail to discharge, or be prevented
from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output terminals. If the drive has failed
in a manner that causes the display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors
will not be discharged. In this case, consult Control Techniques or their authorised
distributor.
Competence of the installer

The drive must be installed by professional assemblers who are familiar with the
requirements for safety and EMC. The assembler is responsible for ensuring that the
Italiano
WARNING end product or system complies with all the relevant laws in the country where it is to be
used.
The weights of the size 4, 5 and 6 drives are as follows:

Size 4: 30 kg (66 lb)
Size 5: 55 kg (121 lb)
WARNING Size 6: 75 kg (165 lb)
Use appropriate safeguards when lifting these models
NOTE When replacing the terminal covers the screws should be tightened with a maximum
torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).
3.1 Mounting methods

Unidrive SP size 1 to 6 can be either surface or through-panel mounted using the
appropriate brackets. Size 0 can only be surface mounted.
Refer to section 10.4 and section 10.5 on page 291 for drawings showing the footprint
of the drive and mounting holes for each method to allow a back plate to be prepared.
If the drive has been used at high load levels for a period of time, the heatsink can reach
temperatures in excess of 70°C (158°F). Human contact with the heatsink should be
prevented.
WARNING

In order to achieve IP54 rating (NEMA 12) for through-panel mounting, an IP54 insert must
English
NOTE
be fitted (size 1 and 2). See section 10.7 on page 293. Derating applies when the IP54
insert is fitted. Additionally, the gasket provided should be fitted between the drive and the
backplate to ensure a good seal for the cubicle. If the heatsink mounted braking resistor is
to be used with the drive through-panel mounted, please refer to the Braking Resistor
Installation Sheet supplied with the resistor prior to mounting the drive. For further
information refer to the Unidrive SP User Guide on the CD Rom supplied with the drive.
3.2 Enclosure
Français Deutsch
Enclosure Layout
Please observe the clearances in the diagram below taking into account any
appropriate notes for other devices / auxiliary equipment when planning the installation.
Figure 3-1 Enclosure layout
Optional braking resistor and overload Locate optional braking
resistor and overload
external to cubicle
(preferably near to or
on top of the cubicle).
Enclosure
AC supply ≥100mm
contactor and (4in)
fuses or MCB
Ensure minimum clearances

are maintained for the drive A Size 0 and 1: ≥0mm (0in)
and external EMC filter. Forced Size 2 to 6: ≥30mm (1.181in)
or convection air-flow must not
be restricted by any object or
cabling
Italiano
A A
The external EMC filter can be

bookcase mounted (next to the Note
drive) or footprint mounted (with For EMC compliance:
the drive mounted onto the filter). 1) When using an external EMC
filter, one filter is required for
each drive Español International
2) Power cabling must be at
least 100mm (4in) from the
≥100mm drive in all directions
(4in) 3) Ensure direct metal contact
External
at drive and filter mounting
controller
points (any paint must be
removed)
Signal cables
Plan for all signal cables
to be routed at least
300mm (12in) from the
drive and any power cable

3.3 EMC filters

English
Internal filter
It is recommended that the internal EMC filter be kept in place unless there is a specific
reason for removing it.
If the drive is part of a regen system or is a Unidrive SP size 3 to 6 on an IT supply then
the internal EMC filter must be removed.
The internal EMC filter reduces radio-frequency emission into the mains supply. Where
the motor cable is short, it permits the requirements of EN61800-3 to be met for the
second environment - for further information see the Unidrive SP User Guide on the CD
Français Deutsch
Rom supplied with the drive. For longer motor cables the filter continues to provide a
useful reduction in emission level, and when used with any length of shielded motor
cable up to the limit for the drive, it is unlikely that nearby industrial equipment will be
disturbed. It is recommended that the filter be used in all applications unless the ground
leakage current (on 400V, 50Hz supply) of 28mA for sizes 0 to 3 and 56mA for sizes 4 to
6 is unacceptable or the above conditions are true.
Refer to section 10.10 on page 299 for the location of the internal EMC filter.
External filter
Refer to section 10.8 on page 294. For further information refer to the Unidrive SP User
Guide on the CD Rom supplied with the drive.
Italiano

4 Electrical Installation
English
Electric shock risk
The voltages present in the following locations can cause severe electric shock and
may be lethal:
WARNING
• AC supply cables and connections
• DC and brake cables, and connections
Français Deutsch
• Output cables and connections
• Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units
Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single insulated and must not be touched.
Isolation device
The AC supply must be disconnected from the drive using an approved isolation device
before any cover is removed from the drive or before any servicing work is performed.
WARNING
STOP function
The STOP function does not remove dangerous voltages from the drive, the motor or any
external option units.
WARNING
SECURE DISABLE function

The SECURE DISABLE function does not remove dangerous voltages from the drive,
the motor or any external option units.
WARNING
Italiano
Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a potentially lethal voltage after the
AC supply has been disconnected. If the drive has been energised, the AC supply must
WARNING be isolated at least ten minutes before work may continue.
Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal resistor. Under certain, unusual fault
conditions, it is possible that the capacitors may fail to discharge, or be prevented from being
discharged by a voltage applied to the output terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner
that causes the display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors will not be
discharged. In this case, consult Control Techniques or their authorised distributor.
Equipment supplied by plug and socket
Special attention must be given if the drive is installed in equipment which is connected
to the AC supply by a plug and socket. The AC supply terminals of the drive are
WARNING connected to the internal capacitors through rectifier diodes which are not intended to
give safety isolation. If the plug terminals can be touched when the plug is disconnected
from the socket, a means of automatically isolating the plug from the drive must be used
(e.g. a latching relay).
Permanent magnet motors

Permanent magnet motors generate electrical power if they are rotated, even when the
supply to the drive is disconnected. If that happens then the drive will become energised
WARNING through its motor terminals.
If the motor load is capable of rotating the motor when the supply is disconnected, then
the motor must be isolated from the drive before gaining access to any live parts.

4.1 Ratings
English
See section 10.1 on page 283.

Maximum continuous input current
The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the selection of cables
and fuses. These values are stated for the worst case condition with the unusual
combination of stiff supply with high imbalance. The value stated for the maximum
continuous input current would only be seen in one of the input phases. The current in
the other two phases would be significantly lower.
The values of maximum input current are stated for a supply with a 2% negative phase-
Français Deutsch
sequence imbalance and rated at the maximum supply fault current given in section
10.1 on page 283.
The recommended cable sizes in section 10.1 on page 283 are only a guide. Refer to
local wiring regulations for the correct size of cables. In some cases a larger cable is
required to avoid excessive voltage drop.
NOTE The recommended output cable sizes in section 10.1 on page 283 assume that the
motor maximum current matches that of the drive. Where a motor of reduced rating is
used the cable rating may be chosen to match that of the motor. To ensure that the motor
and cable are protected against over-load, the drive must be programmed with the
correct motor rated current.
NOTE UL listing is dependent on the use of the correct type of UL-listed fuse, and applies when
symmetrical short-circuit current does not exceed 5kA for sizes 1 to 3.
Fuses
The AC supply to the drive must be fitted with suitable protection against overload and
short-circuits. Section 10.1 on page 283 shows recommended fuse ratings. Failure to
WARNING observe this requirement will cause risk of fire.
Italiano
A fuse or other protection must be included in all live connections to the AC supply.
An MCB (miniature circuit breaker) or MCCB (moulded-case circuit-breaker) with type C
may be used in place of fuses for size 1 to 3 under the following conditions:
• The fault-clearing capacity must be sufficient for the installation
• For frame sizes 2 and 3, the drive must be mounted in an enclosure which meets
the requirements for a fire enclosure
See Chapter 11 UL Listing Information on page 349 for UL listing requirements.
Fuse Types
The fuse voltage rating must be suitable for the drive supply voltage.
4.2 Power connections
Refer to section 10.9 on page 296 for details of the Unidrive SP power connections.
Ground connections
The drive must be connected to the system ground of the AC supply. The ground wiring
must conform to local regulations and codes of practice.
On size 0, the supply and motor ground connections are made using the M6 threaded
hole in the metal back plate of the drive located at the top and bottom of the drive.
On size 1, the supply and motor ground connections are made using the M5 studs
located either side of the drive near the plug-in power connector.
On size 2, the supply and motor ground connections are made using the grounding
bridge that locates at the bottom of the drive.
On size 3, the supply and motor ground connections are made using a M6 nut and bolt

that locates in the fork protruding from the heatsink between the AC supply and motor
English
output terminals.
On size 4 to 6, the supply and motor ground connections are made using M10 studs
located at the top and bottom of the drive near the input and output power connections.
See Figure 4-1 for details.
The ground loop impedance must conform to the requirements of local safety regulations.
The drive must be grounded by a connection capable of carrying the prospective fault
current until the protective device (fuse, etc.) disconnects the AC supply.
WARNING
The ground connections must be inspected and tested at appropriate intervals.
Français Deutsch
Figure 4-1 Ground connections
Supply
ground
0 1 2
Motor
ground
Italiano
Supply
ground
Plain washers
Spring washer
3 456
M6 bolt
Motor
ground
4.3 Encoder connections

Refer to section 10.12 on page 301.
4.4 Serial communications connections
Refer to section 10.13 on page 302.
4.5 Screen connections
The following guidelines should be followed to ensure suppression of radio-
frequency emission and good noise immunity. It is particularly recommended that
the guidelines for the encoder cable be followed closely in order to avoid disturbance to

the encoder operation from electrical noise.

English
Use the grounding bracket and grounding clamp supplied with the drive to terminate the
screens at the drive.
Motor cable: use a motor cable with an overall shield. Connect the shield of the motor
cable to the ground terminal of the motor frame using a link that is as short as possible
and not exceeding 50mm (2in) long. A full 360° termination of the shield to the terminal
housing of the motor is beneficial.
Encoder cable: for best screening use cable with an overall shield and individual
shields on twisted pairs, connect the cable as illustrated in Figure 4-2. Clamp the overall
Français Deutsch
shield to grounded metallic surfaces at both the encoder and the drive.
Brake resistor cable: the optional braking resistor should also be wired with shielded
cable. If unshielded wire is required refer to Unidrive SP User Guide for guidance.
Control cables: if the control wiring is to leave the enclosure, it must be shielded and
the shield(s) clamped to the drive using the grounding bracket. Remove the outer
insulating cover of the cable to ensure the shield(s) make contact with the bracket, but
keep the shield(s) intact until as close as possible to the terminals.
Figure 4-2 Feedback cable screen connections
Twisted Twisted
pair pair
Shield shield shield Shield
connection Cable connection
to 0V to 0V
Connection Connection
at drive at motor
Cable Cable
shield Ground clamp shield
on shield
Italiano

4.6 Control connections
English
Figure 4-3 Default terminal functions
1 11
Polarised signal 41 42
connectors
21 31
1 0V
2 +24V input
Français Deutsch
Analog frequency/speed
reference 1
3 0V
Single-ended 5 Non-inverting input
signal
6 Inverting input
0V
Non-inverting input
Differential signal
Inverting input
4 +10V output
Analog
frequency/speed 7 Analog input 2
reference 2
Analog input 3 8 Analog input 3

(Motor thermistor)
Italiano
9 Analog output 1
Speed / frequency 10 Analog output 2
Torque (active
current)
11 0V
21 0V
22
+24V output
(user selectable)
23 0V
At zero speed 24 Digital I/O 1
Reset 25 Digital I/O 2

Run forward 26 Digital I/O 3
Run reverse 27 Digital input 4
Analog input 1/ Analog input 1
input 2 select 28 Digital input 5
Analog input 2
Jog forward select 29 Digital input 6
30 0V
31
Drive enable (SECURE
DISABLE function)*
41
Drive healthy Relay
42
*The Secure Disable / Drive enable terminal is a positive logic input only.
NOTE Avoid connecting digital and analog grounds (T21 and T11).

5 Getting Started
English
This chapter introduces the user interfaces, menu structure and security level of the drive.
5.1 Understanding the display
There are two types of keypad available for the Unidrive SP. The SM-Keypad/SP0 Keypad has an
LED display and the SM-Keypad Plus has an LCD display.
Size 0: Only the SP0 Keypad can be fitted to the drive.
Français Deutsch
Size 1 to 6: Both the SM-Keypad and SM-Keypad Plus can be fitted to the drive.
For all sizes the SM-Keypad Plus can also be remotely mounted on an enclosure door.
5.1.1 SM-Keypad/SP0 Keypad (LED) 5.1.2 SM-Keypad Plus (LCD)
The display consists of two horizontal rows of 7 The display consists of three lines of text.
segment LED displays. The top line shows the drive status or the current
The upper display shows the drive status or the menu and parameter number being viewed on
current menu and parameter number being the left, and the parameter value or the specific
viewed. trip type on the right.
The lower display shows the parameter value or The lower two lines show the parameter name or
the specific trip type. the help text.
Figure 5-1 SM-Keypad Figure 5-2 SM-Keypad Plus
Upper display
Lower display
Mode (black) button Mode (black) button
Help button
Control buttons Control buttons
Fwd / Rev (blue) button Joypad Fwd / Rev (blue) button Joypad
Italiano
Stop/reset (red) button Stop/reset (red) button

Start (green) button Start (green) button
Figure 5-3 SP0 Keypad
Upper display
Lower display Navigation keys
Start (green) button Mode (black) button

Fwd / Rev (blue) button Stop/reset (red) button
NOTE The red stop button is also used to reset the drive.
All keypads can indicate when a SMARTCARD access is taking place or when the
second motor map is active (menu 21). These are indicated on the displays as follows.
SM-Keypad / SP0 Keypad SM-Keypad Plus

The decimal point after the The symbol ‘CC’ will appear in
SMARTCARD access taking
fourth digit in the upper display the lower left hand corner of
place
will flash. the display
The decimal point after the The symbol ‘Mot2’ will appear
Second motor map active third digit in the upper display in the lower left hand corner of
will flash. the display

5.2 Keypad operation
English
5.2.1 Control buttons
The keypad consists of:
1. Joypad - used to navigate the parameter structure and change parameter values.
2. Mode button - used to change between the display modes – parameter view,
parameter edit, status.
3. Three control buttons - used to control the drive if keypad mode is selected.
4. Help button (SM-Keypad Plus only) - displays text briefly describing the selected
parameter.
Français Deutsch
The Help button toggles between other display modes and parameter help mode. The
up and down functions on the joypad scroll the help text to allow the whole string to be
viewed. The right and left functions on the joypad have no function when help text is
being viewed.
The display examples in this section show the SM-Keypad 7 segment LED display. The
examples are the same for the SM-Keypad Plus except that the information displayed
on the lower row on the SM-Keypad is displayed on the right hand side of the top row on
the SM-Keypad Plus.
Figure 5-4 Display modes
Status
Mode
(Display
not
flashing)
Timeout** Timeout** Timeout**
To enter Parameter
Mode, press key or To return to
Status Mode,
press key
Italiano
Parameter When returning
Mode to Parameter
(Upper Mode use the Temporary
display Parameter
*
flashing) Mode
keys to select (Upper display
Use * keys another parameter flashing)
to select parameter for editing to change, if
required
To exit Edit Mode,
press key
To enter Edit Mode,
press key
RO R/W
parameter parameter
Edit Mode
(Character to be edited in lower line of display flashing)
Change parameter values using keys.
* can only be used to move between menus if L2 access has been enabled (Pr
0.49). Refer to section 5.11 Parameter access level and security on page 25.
**Timeout defined by Pr 11.41 (default value = 240s).

Figure 5-5 Mode examples

English
Parameter
Status Mode
View Mode
Healthy Status Alarm Status Trip Status
Menu 5. Parameter 5 Drive status = tripped

Pr 5.05 value Trip type (UU = undervolts)
Français Deutsch
Do not change parameter values without careful consideration; incorrect values may
cause damage or a safety hazard.
WARNING
NOTE When changing the values of parameters, make a note of the new values in case they
need to be entered again.
NOTE For new parameter-values to apply after the AC supply to the drive is interrupted, new
values must be saved. Refer to section 5.7 Saving parameters on page 24.
5.3 Menu 0
Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for basic easy set
up of the drive.
Appropriate parameters are cloned from the advanced menus into menu 0 and thus
exist in both locations.
For further information, refer to Chapter 6 Basic parameters (Menu 0) on page 28.
Figure 5-6 Menu 0 Cloning
Italiano
Menu 2
2.21 5
Menu 0
Menu 1
0.04 5
0.05 0
0.06 150
1.14 0
Menu 4
4.07 150
5.4 Menu structure

The drive parameter structure consists of menus and parameters.
The drive initially powers up so that only menu 0 can be viewed. The up and down arrow
buttons are used to navigate between parameters and once level 2 access (L2) has
been enabled (see Pr 0.49) the left and right buttons are used to navigate between
menus. For further information, refer to section 5.11 Parameter access level and
security on page 25.

Figure 5-7 Menu structure
English
Menu 0 Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 21 Menu 22
Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 Pr 2.00 Pr 21.00 Pr 22.00
Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 Pr 2.01 Pr 21.01 Pr 22.01
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 Pr 2.02 Pr 21.02 Pr 22.02
Pr 0.48 Pr 1.49 Pr 2.36 Pr 21.29 Pr 22.27

Moves
Pr 0.49 Pr 1.50 Pr 2.37 Pr 21.30 Pr 22.28 between
Français Deutsch
Pr 0.50 Pr 1.51 Pr 2.38 Pr 21.31 Pr 22.29 parameters
Moves between Menus

The menus and parameters roll over in both directions.
i.e. if the last parameter is displayed, a further press will cause the display to rollover
and show the first parameter.
When changing between menus the drive remembers which parameter was last viewed
in a particular menu and thus displays that parameter.
Italiano

5.5 Advanced menus

English
The advanced menus consist of groups or parameters appropriate to a specific function

or feature of the drive. Menus 0 to 22 can be viewed on both keypads. Menus 40 and 41
are specific to the SM-Keypad Plus (LCD). Menus 70 to 91 can be viewed with an SM-
Keypad Plus (LCD) only when an SM-Applications is fitted.
Menu Description LED LCD

0 Commonly used basic set up parameters for quick / easy programming 9 9
1 Frequency / speed reference 9 9
Français Deutsch
2 Ramps 9 9
3 Slave frequency, speed feedback and speed control 9 9
4 Torque and current control 9 9
5 Motor control 9 9
6 Sequencer and clock 9 9
7 Analog I/O 9 9
8 Digital I/O 9 9
9 Programmable logic, motorised pot and binary sum 9 9
10 Status and trips 9 9
11 General drive set-up 9 9
12 Threshold detectors and variable selectors 9 9
13 Position control 9 9
14 User PID controller 9 9
15, 16, 17 Solutions Module set-up 9 9
18 Application menu 1 9 9
21 Second motor parameters 9 9
Italiano
22 Additional Menu 0 set-up 9 9

40 Keypad configuration menu X 9
41 User filter menu X 9
70 PLC registers X 9
85 Timer function parameters X 9
86 Digital I/O parameters X 9
88 Status parameters X 9
90 General parameters X 9
91 Fast access parameters X 9

SM-Keypad Plus set-up menus
English
Table 5-1 Menu 40 parameter descriptions
Parameter Range(Ú)
40.00 Parameter 0 0 to 32767
English (0), Custom (1), French (2),
40.01 Language selection
German (3), Spanish (4), Italian (5)
40.02 Software version 999999
Idle (0), Save (1), Restore (2),
40.03 Save to flash
Default (3)
Français Deutsch
40.04 LCD contrast 0 to 31
Drive and attribute database upload was
40.05 Updated (0), Bypass (1)
bypassed
40.06 Browsing favourites control Normal (0), Filter (1)
40.07 Keypad security code 0 to 999
Disable (0), Slot1 (1), Slot2 (2),
40.08 Communication channel selection
Slot3 (3), Slave (4), Direct (5)
40.09 Hardware key code 0 to 999
40.10 Drive node ID (Address) 0 to 255
40.11 Flash ROM memory size 4Mbit (0), 8Mbit (1)
40.12 Replacement macro enable None (0), Replace (1)
40.13 Replacement macro number 0 to 255
40.14 Wizard macro enable None (0), Wizard (1)
40.15 Wizard macro number 0 to 255
40.16 Assistance on action macro enable None (0), Action (1)
40.17 Assistance on action macro number 0 to 255
40.18 Assistance on action threshold parameter 0 to 499.99
40.19 String database version number 0 to 999999
40.20 Screen saver strings and enable None (0), Default (1), User (2)
Italiano
40.21 Screen saver interval 0 to 600
40.22 Turbo browse time interval 0 to 200ms
Table 5-2 Menu 41 parameter descriptions

Parameter Range(Ú)
41.00 Parameter 0 0 to 32767
41.01 to
Browsing filter source F01 to F50 Pr 0.00 to Pr 391.51
41.50
41.51 Browsing favourites control Normal (0), Filter (1)
5.6 Changing the operating mode
Changing the operating mode returns all parameters to their default value, including the
motor parameters. (Pr 0.49 Security status and Pr 0.34 User security code are not
affected by this procedure.)
Procedure
Use the following procedure only if a different operating mode is required:
1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 31 is open or Pr 6.15 is Off (0)
2. Enter either of the following values in Pr 0.00, as appropriate:
1253 (Europe, 50Hz AC supply frequency)
1254 (USA, 60Hz AC supply frequency)

3. Change the setting of Pr 0.48 as follows:

English
Pr 0.48 setting Operating mode
1 Open-loop
2 Closed-loop Vector
3 Closed-loop Servo
Français Deutsch
Regen (See the Unidrive SP Regen User Guide for more

4
information about operating in this mode)
The figures in the second column apply when serial communications are used.
4. Either:
• Press the red reset button
• Toggle the reset digital input
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting Pr 10.38 to 100
(ensure that Pr. xx.00 returns to 0).
5.7 Saving parameters
When changing a parameter in Menu 0, the new value is saved when pressing the
Mode button to return to parameter view mode from parameter edit mode.
If parameters have been changed in the advanced menus, then the change will not be
saved automatically. A save function must be carried out.
Procedure
Enter 1000* in Pr. xx.00
Italiano
Either:
*If the drive is in the under voltage trip state or is being supplied from a 48V back-up
supply, a value of 1001 must be entered into Pr xx.00 to perform a save function.
5.8 Restoring parameter defaults

Restoring parameter defaults by this method saves the default values in the drive’s
memory. (Pr 0.49 and Pr 0.34 are not affected by this procedure.)
Procedure
1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 31 is open or Pr 6.15 is Off (0)
2. Enter 1233 (EUR 50Hz settings) or 1244 (USA 60Hz settings) in Pr xx.00.
3. Either:

5.9 Displaying parameters with non-default values only
English
By entering 12000 in Pr xx.00, the only parameters that will be visible to the user will be
those containing a non-default value. This function does not require a drive reset to
become active. In order to deactivate this function, return to Pr xx.00 and enter a value
of 0.
Please note that this function can be affected by the access level enabled, refer to
section 5.11 Parameter access level and security for further information regarding
access level.
5.10 Displaying destination parameters only
Français Deutsch
By entering 12001 in Pr xx.00, the only parameters that will be visible to the user will be
destination parameters. This function does not require a drive reset to become active. In
order to deactivate this function, return to Pr xx.00 and enter a value of 0.
Please note that this function can be affected by the access level enabled, refer to
section 5.11 Parameter access level and security for further information regarding
access level.
5.11 Parameter access level and security
The parameter access level determines whether the user has access to menu 0 only or
to all the advanced menus (menus 1 to 22) in addition to menu 0.
The User Security determines whether the access to the user is read only or read write.
Both the User Security and Parameter Access Level can operate independently of each
other as shown in the table below:
Pr Access Level User Security Menu 0 status Advanced menus status

L1 Open RW Not visible
L1 Closed RO Not visible
L2 Open RW RW
Italiano
L2 Closed RO RO
RW = Read / write access RO = Read only access
The default settings of the drive are Parameter Access Level L1 and user Security
Open, i.e. read / write access to Menu 0 with the advanced menus not visible.

5.11.1 Access Level

English
The access level is set in Pr 0.49 and allows or prevents access to the advanced menu
parameters.
L1 access selected - Menu 0 only visible
Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 19.00 Pr 20.00

Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 ............ Pr 19.01 Pr 20.01
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 19.02 Pr 20.02
Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ............ Pr 19.03 Pr 20.03
............
............
Français Deutsch
Pr 0.49 Pr 1.49 ............ Pr 19.49 Pr 20.49

Pr 0.50 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 19.50 Pr 20.50
L2 access selected - All parameters visible
Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 21.00 Pr 22.00

Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 ............ Pr 21.01 Pr 22.01
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 21.02 Pr 22.02
Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ............ Pr 21.03 Pr 22.03
............
............
Italiano
Pr 0.49 Pr 1.49 ............ Pr 21.30 Pr 22.28

Pr 0.50 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 21.31 Pr 22.29
5.11.2 Changing the Access Level

The Access Level is determined by the setting of Pr 0.49 as follows:
String Value Effect
L1 0 Access to menu 0 only
L2 1 Access to all menus (menu 0 to menu 22)
The Access Level can be changed through the keypad even if the User Security has
been set.

5.11.3 User Security
English
The User Security, when set, prevents write access to any of the parameters (other than
Pr. 0.49 and Pr 11.44 Access Level) in any menu.
User security open - All parameters: Read / Write access
Français Deutsch
Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 21.00 Pr 22.00
Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 ............ Pr 21.01 Pr 22.01
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 21.02 Pr 22.02
Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ............ Pr 21.03 Pr 22.03
............
............
Pr 0.49 Pr 1.49 ............ Pr 21.30 Pr 22.28
Pr 0.50 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 21.31 Pr 22.29
User security closed - All parameters: Read Only access

(except Pr 0.49 and Pr 11.44)
Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 21.00 Pr 22.00
Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 ............ Pr 21.01 Pr 22.01
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 21.02 Pr 22.02
Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ............ Pr 21.03 Pr 22.03
............
............
Pr 0.49 Pr 1.49 ............ Pr 21.30 Pr 22.28
Italiano
Pr 0.50 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 21.31 Pr 22.29
Setting User Security

Enter a value between 1 and 999 in Pr 0.34 and press the button; the security code
has now been set to this value. In order to activate the security, the Access level must
be set to Loc in Pr 0.49. When the drive is reset, the security code will have been
activated and the drive returns to Access Level L1. The value of Pr 0.34 will return to 0
in order to hide the security code. At this point, the only parameter that can be changed
by the user is the Access Level Pr 0.49. Español International
Unlocking User Security
Select a read write parameter to be edited and press the button, the upper display
will now show CodE. Use the arrow buttons to set the security code and press the
button.
With the correct security code entered, the display will revert to the parameter selected
in edit mode.
If an incorrect security code is entered the display will revert to parameter view mode.
To lock the User Security again, set Pr 0.49 to Loc and press the reset button.
Disabling User Security
Unlock the previously set security code as detailed above. Set Pr 0.34 to 0 and press
the button. The User Security has now been disabled, and will not have to be
unlocked each time the drive is powered up to allow read / write access to the
parameters.

6 Basic parameters (Menu 0)

English
Parameter Range(Ú) Default(Ö) Type

OL VT SV OL VT SV
0.00 xx.00 {x.00} 0 to 32,767 0 RW
±SPEED_LIMIT_MAX
0.01 Minimum reference clamp {1.07} ±3,000.0Hz 0.0 RW
Hz/rpm
EUR>
0 to 3,000.0 SPEED_LIMIT_MAX Hz/ EUR> 50.0 1,500.0
0.02 Maximum reference clamp {1.06} 3,000.0 RW
Hz rpm USA> 60.0 USA>
Français Deutsch
1800.0
0.0 to
{2.11} 0.000 to 3,200.000
0.03 Acceleration rate 3,200.0 5.0 2.000 0.200 RW
s/1,000rpm
s/100Hz
0.0 to
0.000 to 3,200.000
0.04 Deceleration rate {2.21} 3,200.0 10.0 2.000 0.200 RW
s/1,000rpm
s/100Hz
A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (1), A2.Pr (2), Pr (3),
0.05 Reference select {1.14} A1.A2 (0) RW
Pad (4), Prc (5)
0.06 Current limit {4.07} 0 to Current_limit_max % 165.0 175.0 RW
Ur_S (0),
Ur (1),
Fd (2),
OL> Voltage mode select {5.14} Ur_I (4) RW
0.07 Ur_Auto (3),
Ur_I (4),
SrE (5)
CL> Speed controller P gain {3.10} 0.0000 to 6.5535 1/rad s-1 0.0300 0.0100 RW
Size 0 to 2:
0.0 to
3.0
25.0% of
OL> Voltage boost {5.15} Size 4 & 5: RW
0.08 motor rated
2.0
voltage
Size 6: 1.0
CL> Speed controller I gain {3.11} 0.00 to 655.35 1/rad 0.10 1.00 RW
OFF (0) or
Italiano
OL> Dynamic V/F {5.13} 0 RW

0.09 On (1)
CL> Speed controller D gain {3.12} 0.00000 to 0.65535 (s) 0.00000 RW
±180,000
OL> Estimated motor speed {5.04} RO
0.10 rpm
CL> Motor speed {3.02} ±Speed_max rpm RO
OL & VT> Drive output
{5.01} ±Speed_freq_max Hz RO
frequency
0.11 0 to 65,535
SV> Drive encoder position {3.29} 1/216ths of RO
a revolution
0.12 Total motor current {4.01} 0 to Drive_current_max A RO
OL & VT> Motor active current {4.02} ±Drive_current_max A RO

0.13
SV> Analog input 1 offset trim {7.07} ±10.000 % 0.000 RW
0.14 Torque mode selector {4.11} 0 to 1 0 to 4 Speed control mode (0) RW
FASt (0)
FASt (0)
0.15 Ramp mode select {2.04} Std (1) Std (1) RW
Std (1)
Std.hV (2)
OL> T28 and T29 auto-selection OFF (0) or
{8.39} 0 RW
0.16 disable On (1)
CL> Ramp enable {2.02} OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW
Pr 0.00 to
OL> T29 digital input destination {8.26} Pr 6.31 RW
Pr 21.51
0.17
CL> Current demand filter time
{4.12} 0.0 to 25.0 ms 0.0 RW
constant
0.18 Positive logic select {8.29} OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20tr (2), 20-
0.19 Analog input 2 mode {7.11} th (8) RW
4tr (3), 4-20 (4), 20-4 (5), VOLt (6)
0.20 Analog input 2 destination {7.14} Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 1.37 RW
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20tr (2), 20-
0.21 Analog input 3 mode {7.15} 4tr (3), 4-20 (4), 20-4 (5), VOLt (6), VOLt (6) RW
th.SC (7), th (8), th.diSp (9)
0.22 Bipolar reference select {1.10} OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW

Parameter Range(Ú) Default(Ö) Type
English
OL VT SV OL VT SV
0.23 Jog reference {1.05} 0 to 400.0 Hz 0 to 4000.0 rpm 0.0 RW
0.24 Pre-set reference 1 {1.21} ±Speed_limit_max rpm 0.0 RW
0.25 Pre-set reference 2 {1.22} ±Speed_limit_max rpm 0.0 RW
±Speed_
OL> Pre-set reference 3 {1.23} freq_max 0.0 RW
0.26 Hz/rpm
CL> Overspeed threshold {3.08} 0 to 40,000 rpm 0 RW
±Speed_
OL> Pre-set reference 4 {1.24} freq_max 0.0 RW
0.27 Hz/rpm
Français Deutsch
CL> Drive encoder lines per
{3.34} 0 to 50,000 1024 4096 RW
revolution
0.28 Keypad fwd/rev key enable {6.13} OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW
0.29 SMARTCARD parameter data {11.36} 0 to 999 0 RO
nonE (0), rEAd (1), Prog (2),
0.30 Parameter cloning {11.42} nonE (0) RW
AutO (3), boot (4)
0.31 Drive rated voltage {11.33} 200 (0), 400 (1), 575 (2), 690 (3) V RO
Maximum Heavy Duty current
0.32 {11.32} 0.00 to 9999.99A RO
rating
OL> Catch a spinning motor {6.09} 0 to 3 0 RW
0.33
VT> Rated rpm autotune {5.16} 0 to 2 0 RW
0.34 User security code {11.30} 0 to 999 0 RW
0.35 Serial comms mode {11.24} AnSI (0), rtu (1), Lcd (2) rtU (1) RW
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), 2400 (3),
4800 (4), 9600 (5), 19200 (6), 38400 (7),
0.36 Serial comms baud rate {11.25} 19200 (6) RW
57600 (8) Modbus RTU only, 115200 (9)
Modbus RTU only
0.37 Serial comms address {11.23} 0 to 247 1 RW
200V drive: 75
All voltage 400V drive: 150
0.38 Current loop P gain {4.13} 0 to 30,000 RW
ratings: 20 575V drive: 180
690V drive: 215
200V drive: 1000
All voltage 400V drive: 2000
Italiano
0.39 Current loop I gain {4.14} 0 to 30,000 RW
ratings 40 575V drive: 2400
690V drive: 3000
0.40 Autotune {5.12} 0 to 2 0 to 4 0 to 6 0 RW
0.41 Maximum switching frequency {5.18} 3 (0), 4 (1), 6 (2), 8 (3), 12 (4), 16 (5) kHz 3 (0) 6 (2) RW
0.42 No. of motor poles {5.11} 0 to 60 (Auto to 120 pole) 0 (Auto) 6 POLE (3) RW
OL & VT> Motor rated power
{5.10} 0.000 to 1.000 0.850 RW
factor
0.43
0.0 to
SV> Encoder phase angle {3.25} 0.0 RW
359.9°
200V drive: 230
400V drive: EUR> 400, USA> 460
0.44 Motor rated voltage {5.09} 0 to AC_voltage_set_max V RW Español International
575V drive: 575
690V drive: 690
EUR>
0 to 0.00 to EUR>
OL & VT> Motor rated full load 1,450.00
{5.08} 180,000 40,000.00 1,500 RW
0.45 speed (rpm) USA>
rpm rpm USA> 1,800
1,770.00
SV> Motor thermal time constant {4.15} 0.0 to 400.0 20.0 RW
0.46 Motor rated current {5.07} 0 to Rated_current_max A Drive rated current [11.32] RW
0 to 3,000.0 0 to 1,250.0 EUR> 50.0
0.47 Rated frequency {5.06} RW
Hz Hz USA> 60.0
OPEn LP (1), CL VECt (2), OPEn LP
0.48 Operating mode selector {11.31} CL VECt (2) SErVO (3) RW
SErVO (3), rEgEn (4) (1)
0.49 Security status {11.44} L1 (0), L2 (1), Loc (2) RW
0.50 Software version {11.29} 1.00 to 99.99 RO
0.51 Action on trip detection {10.37} 0 to 15 0 RW
Key:
OL Open loop {X.XX} Cloned advanced parameter
CL Closed loop vector and Servo RW Read/write: can be written by the user
VT Closed loop vector RO Read only: can only be read by the user
SV Servo

Figure 6-1 Menu 0 logic diagram

English
28 29
The function of the two digital inputs are controlled by the setting of Pr 0.05 (reference selector). See table below for details.
Analog reference
6
Analog input 2 Analog input 2
offset trim destination
Français Deutsch
Any
0.13 0.20 unprotected
variable
parameter
Analog input + Analog
2 mode ??.?? reference 2
+
7 0.19 1.37 Reference
0.05
selector
??.??
OR
Bipolar
reference
select
0.22
Preset frequency
reference
Preset
0.24
frequency 1
A1.A2
Preset 0
0.25 A1.Pr 1
frequency 2
Open Loop only A2.Pr
2
Preset
0.26 Pr
frequency 3 3
Preset PAd
0.27 4
frequency 4 Prc
5
Keypad reference
0.23
Jog reference
M
Enable forward /
0.28
reverse key Digital inputs T28 & T29
Italiano
Pr 0.05 T28 T29

Preset reference A1.A2 Local/Remote Jog
A1.Pr Preset reference selectors
A2.Pr Preset reference selectors
Pr Preset reference selectors
PAd Local/Remote Jog
Prc Local/Remote Jog
The parameters are all shown in their default settings
Key: Connected to
Input Summing junction
ground / off
Output Invert Limit
Input or output
programmable & AND Comparator
0.XX RW parameter OR OR Σ Sum
X.XX
Selector controlled
0.XX RO parameter NOR NOR
by Pr x.xx

English
RUN RUN OL> FREQUENCY
FORWARD REVERSE RESET CL> SPEED TORQUE AT ZERO SPEED
26 27 25 9 10 24
Analog outputs Digital output
Français Deutsch
Motor control
Maximum Current
frequency/ 0.06
limit
speed clamp
0.14 Torque mode
0.02 Ramp selector
enable
OL> Catch a
Minimum 0.16 spinning motor
frequency/ 0.33 VT> Motor full
speed clamp load rated speed
autotune
0.01
CL>
0.17 Current demand
filter time
Closed loop only
constant
Motor parameters
0.42 ~ 0.47
Ramps
CL> No. of poles
Power factor
Rated voltage
CL> Speed-loop PID gains Rated speed
Rated current
Rated frequency
0.07 Speed-loop SV> Motor thermal
proportional time constant
gain
0.03
Acceleration 0.08 Speed-loop
rate integral gain
OL> Motor-voltage control

0.04
Italiano
Deceleration 0.07 L1 L2 L3 Drive
rate Voltage mode
Speed-loop selector
0.10
0.15 0.09 derivative
gain 0.08
Ramp mode
selector Estimated
Boost voltage
motor
speed _ +
0.09
Dynamic V/f
Motor speed select
0.10
Power stage _
PWM switching +
0.41
frequency
Drive encoder Drive output
0.27 0.11
ppr frequency
0.26
Overspeed
threshold OL & VT> Total motor
Motor active current
current 0.13 0.12
_
U V W + BR
Magnetising
15 way sub-D
current
connector
Resistor
optional
Volts to frequency
V/f ∫ Integrate
conversion
Analog to digital
A/D d/dt Differentiate
conversion
Modulus
Relay
Comparator with
hysteresis 0V
X.XX
Switch controlled
by Pr x.xx

7 Running the motor

English
This chapter takes the new user through all the essential steps to running a motor for
the first time, in each of the possible operating modes.
Ensure that no damage or safety hazard could arise from the motor starting
unexpectedly.
WARNING
Français Deutsch
The values of the motor parameters affect the protection of the motor.
The default values in the drive should not be relied upon.
It is essential that the correct value is entered in Pr 0.46 Motor rated current. This affects
CAUTION the thermal protection of the motor.
If the keypad mode has been used previously, ensure that the keypad reference has
been set to 0 using the buttons as if the drive is started using the keypad it will
CAUTION
run to the speed defined by the keypad reference (Pr 0.35).
If the intended maximum speed affects the safety of the machinery, additional
independent over-speed protection must be used.
WARNING
7.1 Quick start Connections

7.1.1 Basic requirements
This section shows the basic connections which must be made for the drive to run in the
Italiano
required mode. For minimal parameter settings to run in each mode please see the
relevant part of section 7.2 Quick Start commissioning on page 36.
Table 7-1 Minimum control connection requirements for each control mode
Drive control method Requirements
Drive Enable
Terminal mode Speed reference
Run forward or run reverse command
Keypad mode Drive Enable

Drive Enable
Serial communications
Serial communications link
Table 7-2 Minimum control connection requirements for each mode of

operation
Operating mode Requirements

Open loop and RFC mode Induction motor
Closed loop vector mode Induction motor with speed feedback
Permanent magnet motor with speed and position
Closed loop servo mode
feedback

Figure 7-1 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 0)
English
L3 L2 L1
Fuses
Braking resistor
! (optional)
Français Deutsch
2
1
2
L1 L2
3 0V
+10V
4
Speed
5 reference
input
6
7
Serial 8
communications
port 9
10
11 T
Terminal Encoder connections e
1
2
A
A\
F
F\
Cos
Cos\
r
3
4
B
B\
D
D\
Sin
Sin\
21 m
5 Z Data
22 24V i
6
7 U
Z\
Fout Aout Fout
Data\
Aout
23
n
8
9
U\
V
Fout\
Dout
Aout\
Bout
Fout\
Dout
Aout\
Bout a
10
11
V\ Dout\
W
Bout\ Dout\ Bout\
Clk
24 l
12 W\ Clk\ 25
13 +V +V
14 0V 0V
M
Italiano
15 Th Th 26 RUN FWD
5 1
27 RUN REV
o
10 6
28 d
e
15 11
Encoder connector 29
15 way D-type U V W
30 K
DRIVE e
31 ENABLE y
Induction Servo motor
p
motor (permanent magnet) a
d Español International
M
o
U V W U V W SP0 Keypad d
e
Pr 0.05
E E =PAd (4)
A A
A A
B B
B B
Z Z 1
U U 1 Marker pulse optional
Open loop V V
2 Thermal overload for braking resistor
W W to protect against fire risk. This must be
RFC Z Z 1
wired to interrupt the AC supply in the
event of a fault. This is not required if the
optional internal braking resistor is used
Closed loop vector Servo

Figure 7-2 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 1 to 3)
English
Braking resistor Braking resistor

! (optional) - Size 2
and 3 only ! (optional) -
Size 1 only
2 2
1
DC1 = -
DC2 = + DC1 DC2 BR 48V
_ + BR 2
3 0V
+10V
4
Speed
5 reference
Français Deutsch
input
6
7
Serial 8
communications
port 9
10
Terminal
1 A
Encoder connections
F Cos
11 T
2
3
A\
B
F\
D
Cos\
Sin
e
4 B\ D\ Sin\ r
5
6
Z
Z\
Data
Data\ 21 m
7
8
U
U\
Fout
Fout\
Aout
Aout\
Fout
Fout\
Aout
Aout\ 22 24V i
9
10
V
V\
Dout
Dout\
Bout
Bout\
Dout
Dout\
Bout
Bout\
23
n
11
12
W
W\
Clk
Clk\
a
13
14
+V
0V
+V
0V
24 l
15 Th Th 25
5 1 26 RUN FWD M
10
15
6
11 27 RUN REV
o
Encoder connector
PE
28 d
15 way D-type
29
e
L1 L2 L3 U V W
30 K
DRIVE e
31 ENABLE y
p
Italiano
Induction Servo motor

motor (permanent
magnet) a
d
M
o
U V W U V W
SM-Keypad / SM-Keypad Plus.
d
Optional item, must be fitted e
for keypad mode. Pr 0.05
E E =PAd (4)
Fuses
A A
A A
B B
B B
Z Z 1
Open loop V V
RFC Z Z 1 L1 L2 L3

Figure 7-3 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 4 to 6)
English
L3 L2 L1
Fuses
Français Deutsch
2
3 0V
L1 L2 L3 +10V
4
Speed
5 reference
input
6
7
Serial 8
communications
port 9
10
11 T
Terminal Encoder connections e
1
2
A
A\
F
F\
Cos
Cos\ r
3
4
B
B\
D
D\
Sin
Sin\ 21 m
5
6
Z
Z\
Data
Data\ 22 24V i
7 U Fout Aout Fout Aout
23
n
8
9
U\
V
Fout\
Dout
Aout\
Bout
Fout\
Dout
Aout\
Bout a
10 V\ Dout\ Bout\ Dout\ Bout\
11
12
W
W\
Clk
Clk\
24 l
13 +V +V 25
14
15
0V
Th
0V
Th 26 RUN FWD M
5 1 27 RUN REV
o
10 6 d
Italiano
15 11 28
Encoder connector 29
e
24V
15 way D-type U V W
External
+DC
! 30 K
supply
DRIVE e
Fan supply -
size 6 only 2
31 ENABLE y
Induction Servo motor p
motor (permanent
magnet) Braking resistor a
(optional)
d
M
o Español International
U V W U V W
SM-Keypad / SM-Keypad Plus.
d
Optional item, must be fitted e
for keypad mode. Pr 0.05
E E =PAd (4)
A A
A A
B B
B B
Z Z 1
Open loop V V
RFC Z Z 1

7.2 Quick Start commissioning

English
7.2.1 Open loop

Action Detail
Ensure:
Before • The drive enable signal is not given (terminal 31)
power-up • Run signal is not given
• Motor is connected
Ensure:
• Drive displays ‘inh’
Français Deutsch
Power-up If the drive trips, see Chapter 9 Diagnostics on page 45.

the drive Size 0 only: If no internal braking resistor is fitted then the drive will
trip ‘br.th’. If no internal braking resistor is required then set Pr 0.51
to 8 to disable the trip.
Enter:
• Motor rated frequency in Pr 0.47 (Hz)
Enter motor
• Motor rated current in Pr 0.46 (A) Mot X XXXXXXXXX
nameplate No XXXXXXXXXX kg
• Motor rated speed in Pr 0.45 (rpm) IP55

V
I.cl F °C 40 s S1
-1
Hz min kW cosφ A
details 230 50 1445 2.20 0.80
400
8.50
4.90
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 0.44 (V) - check if or CN = 14.5Nm
I.E.C 34 1(87)
240 50 1445 2.20 0.76 8.50
connection 415
CN = 14.4Nm
4.90
CTP- VEN 1PHASE 1=0,46A P=110W R.F 32MN
Set
Enter: 0.02
maximum
• Maximum frequency in Pr 0.02 (Hz)
frequency t
Enter:
• Acceleration rate in Pr 0.03 (s/100Hz)
Set accel. /
100Hz
• Deceleration rate in Pr 0.04 (s/100Hz) (If braking resistor fitted,

decel. rates
Italiano
set Pr 0.15 = FAST. Also ensure Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 are set t
correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be seen.)

0.03 0.04

Action Detail
English
Unidrive SP is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating
autotune. The motor must be at a standstill before an autotune is
enabled. A rotating autotune should be used whenever possible so
the measured value of power factor of the motor is used by the
drive.
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up
to 2/3 base speed in the direction selected regardless of
the reference provided. Once complete the motor will
Français Deutsch
WARNING coast to a stop. The run signal must be removed before
the drive can be made to run at the required reference.
The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the
run signal or removing the drive enable.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded

and it is not possible to uncouple the load from the motor shaft.
A stationary autotune measures the stator resistance of the
motor and the voltage offset in the drive. These are required for cos ∅
good performance in vector control modes. A stationary

autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so
Autotune the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr
RS
0.43. σLS
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is

uncoupled. A rotating autotune first performs a stationary
autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the
direction selected. The rotating autotune measures the power
factor of the motor.
To perform an autotune:
Italiano
• Set Pr 0.40 = 1 for a stationary autotune or set Pr 0.40 = 2 for a
rotating autotune
• Close the Drive Enable signal (terminal 31). The drive will
display ’rdY’.
• Close the run signal (terminal 26 or 27). The lower display will
flash ’Auto’ and ’tunE’ alternatively, while the drive is
performing the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ’rdY’ or ‘inh’, and for the motor to
come to a standstill. Español International
If the drive trips, see Chapter 9 Diagnostics on page 45.
Remove the drive enable and run signal from the drive.
Enter 1000 in Pr xx.00
Save
parameters Press the red reset button or toggle the reset digital input
(ensure Pr xx.00 returns to 0)
Run Drive is now ready to run

7.2.2 RFC mode

English
Induction motor
Action Detail
Ensure:
Before • Drive Enable signal is not given (terminal 31)
• Motor and feedback device are connected
Ensure:
Français Deutsch

the drive Size 0 only: If no internal braking resistor is fitted then the drive will trip
‘br.th’. If no internal braking resistor is required then set Pr 0.51 to 8 to
disable the trip.
Select RFC
mode and
disable • Set Pr 3.24 = 1 to select RFC mode
encoder • Set Pr 3.40 = 0
wire-break
trip
Enter:
Enter motor • Motor rated frequency in Pr 0.47 (Hz)
nameplate • Motor rated current in Pr 0.46 (A) IP55
Mot X XXXXXXXXX
No XXXXXXXXXX kg
I.cl F °C 40 s S1
details • Motor rated speed (base speed - slip speed) in Pr 0.45 (rpm) V Hz min-1 kW cosφ A
230 50 1445 2.20 0.80 8.50
400 4.90
CN = 14.5Nm
I.E.C 34 1(87)
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 0.44 (V) - check if or connection
240 50 1445 2.20 0.76 8.50
415 4.90
CN = 14.4Nm
Set
Enter:
maximum 0.02
• Maximum speed in Pr 0.02 (rpm)

speed
Italiano
Set Enter:
acceleration • Acceleration rate in Pr 0.03 (s/1000rpm) 1000rpm
/ • Deceleration rate in Pr 0.04 (s/1000rpm) (If braking resistor fitted,

deceleration set Pr 0.15 = FAST. Also ensure Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 are set
t
0.03 0.04
rates correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be seen.)


Action Detail
English
Unidrive SP is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune.
The motor must be at a standstill before an autotune is enabled. A
stationary autotune will give moderate performance whereas a rotating
autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual
values of the motor parameters required by the drive.
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to
2/ base speed in the direction selected regardless of the
3
reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a
stop. The run signal must be removed before the drive can
Français Deutsch
WARNING
be made to run at the required reference.

The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run
signal or removing the drive enable.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it

is not possible to uncouple the load from the motor shaft. The
stationary autotune measures the stator resistance and transient
inductance of the motor. These are used to calculate the current cos ∅
loop gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr 0.38 and
Pr 0.39 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the
Autotune
power factor of the motor so the value on the motor nameplate RS
σLS
LS
must be entered into Pr 0.43. T saturation
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled.

Nm break-
points
A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune before N rpm
rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected. The
rotating autotune measures the stator inductance of the motor and
calculates the power factor.
Italiano
rotating autotune
• Close the Drive Enable signal (terminal 31). The drive will display
‘rdY’
flash ‘Auto’ and ‘tunE’ alternatively, while the drive is performing
the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ‘rdY’ or ‘inh’, and for the motor to come
to a standstill
If the drive trips, see Chapter 9 Diagnostics on page 45. Español International
Save
parameters Press the red reset button or toggle the reset digital input (ensure
Pr xx.00 returns to 0)

7.2.3 Closed loop vector mode

English
Induction motor with incremental encoder feedback

For simplicity only an incremental quadrature encoder will be considered here. For
information on setting up one of the other supported speed feedback devices, refer to
Setting up a feedback device in the Unidrive SP User Guide on the CD Rom supplied
with the drive.
Action Detail
Ensure:
Français Deutsch
Before • Drive Enable signal is not given (terminal 31)

• Motor and feedback device are connected
Ensure:
the drive Size 0 only: If no internal braking resistor is fitted then the drive will trip
disable the trip.
Incremental encoder basic set-up
Enter:
• Drive encoder type in Pr 3.38 = Ab (0): Quadrature encoder
• Encoder power supply in Pr. 3.36 = 5V (0), 8V (1) or 15V (2)
Setting the encoder voltage supply too high for the

Set motor encoder could result in damage to the feedback device.
feedback CAUTION
parameters
• Drive encoder Lines Per Revolution (LPR) in Pr 3.34 (set
Italiano
according to encoder)
• Drive encoder termination resistor setting in Pr. 3.39:
0 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
1 = A-A\, B-B\, termination resistors enabled, Z-Z\ termination
resistors disabled
2 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors enabled
Enter:
Enter motor • Motor rated frequency in Pr 0.47 (Hz)
nameplate • Motor rated current in Pr 0.46 (A) Mot X XXXXXXXXX
No XXXXXXXXXX kg
IP55 I.cl F °C 40 s S1
details • Motor rated speed (base speed - slip speed) in Pr 0.45 (rpm) V Hz min-1 kW cosφ A
230 50 1445 2.20 0.80 8.50
400 4.90
CN = 14.5Nm
I.E.C 34 1(87)
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 0.44 (V) - check if or connection

240 50 1445 2.20 0.76 8.50
415 4.90
CN = 14.4Nm
Set
Enter:
maximum 0.02

speed t
Set Enter:
acceleration • Acceleration rate in Pr 0.03 (s/1000rpm) 1000rpm
/ • Deceleration rate in Pr 0.04 (s/1000rpm) (If braking resistor fitted,

deceleration set Pr 0.15 = FAST. Also ensure Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 are set
t
0.03 0.04
rates correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be seen.)

Action Detail
English
Unidrive SP is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune.
The motor must be at a standstill before an autotune is enabled. A
stationary autotune will give moderate performance whereas a rotating
autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual
values of the motor parameters required by the drive.
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to
2/ base speed in the direction selected regardless of the
3
reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a
stop. The run signal must be removed before the drive can
Français Deutsch
WARNING

signal or removing the drive enable.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it

is not possible to uncouple the load from the motor shaft. The
stationary autotune measures the stator resistance and transient
inductance of the motor. These are used to calculate the current cos ∅
loop gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr 0.38 and
Pr 0.39 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the
Autotune power factor of the motor so the value on the motor nameplate RS
σLS
must be entered into Pr 0.43. LS
T
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled.
saturation
Nm break-
points
A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune before N rpm
rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected. The
rotating autotune measures the stator inductance of the motor and
calculates the power factor.
Italiano
rotating autotune
• Close the Drive Enable signal (terminal 31). The drive will display
‘rdY’
flash ‘Auto’ and ‘tunE’ alternatively, while the drive is performing
the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ‘rdY’ or ‘inh’, and for the motor to come
to a standstill
If the drive trips, see Chapter 9 Diagnostics on page 45. Español International
Save

7.2.4 Servo
English
Permanent magnet motor with a speed and position feedback device

For simplicity only an incremental quadrature encoder with commutation outputs will be
considered here. For information on setting up one of the other supported speed
feedback devices, refer to Setting up a feedback device in the Unidrive SP User Guide
on the CD Rom supplied with the drive
Action Detail
Ensure:
Français Deutsch
• Drive Enable signal is not given (terminal 31)

Before
• Run signal is not given
power-up
• Motor is connected
• Feedback device is connected
Ensure:
Power-up the If the drive trips, see Chapter 9 Diagnostics on page 45.
drive Size 0 only: If no internal braking resistor is fitted then the drive will trip
disable the trip.
Incremental encoder basic set-up
Enter:
• Drive encoder type in Pr. 3.38 = Ab.SErVO (3): Quadrature encoder
with commutation outputs
• Encoder power supply in Pr. 3.36 = 5V (0), 8V (1) or 15V (2)
Setting the encoder voltage supply too high for the

Set motor
encoder could result in damage to the feedback device.
feedback
Italiano
CAUTION
parameters
• Drive encoder Pulses Per Revolution in Pr. 3.34 (set according to
encoder)
• Drive encoder termination resistor setting in Pr. 3.39:
0 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
1 = A-A\, B-B\, termination resistors enabled, Z-Z\ termination
resistors disabled
2 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors enabled
Enter motor Enter:

nameplate • Motor rated current in Pr 0.46 (A) Model No: 95UXXXXXXXXXXXX Brake: 12Nm
details • Number of poles in Pr 0.42

Volts: 380/480 24V
Cont: 7.7Nm:4.81Arms 0.67A
Stall: 9.5Nm:5.91Arms
Speed: 3000rpm Poles:6 Control Techniques
Kt: 1.6Nm/Arms Dynamics Ltd
Ins Class: H
ANDOVER, HANTS.
ENGLAND. SP10 5AB
Serial No: XXXXXXXXXXX
Set
Enter:
maximum
0.02

speed t
Enter:
Set
• Acceleration rate in Pr 0.03 (s/1000rpm)
acceleration / 1000rpm
• Deceleration rate in Pr 0.04 (s/1000rpm) (If braking resistor fitted,

deceleration
set Pr 0.15 = FAST. Also ensure Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 are set t
rates
0.03 0.04
correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be seen.)

Action Detail
English
The normal low speed test will rotate the motor by up to 2
revolutions in the direction selected, regardless of the
reference provided. Once complete the motor will come to a
WARNING standstill. The run signal must be removed before the drive can
signal or removing the Drive Enable.
Français Deutsch
• The motor must be uncoupled from the load before attempting this
autotune.
• The normal low speed test will rotate the motor by up to 2 rotations
0
in the direction selected and the drive measures the encoder phase
angle and updates the value in Pr 3.25. This test also measures the 0
Autotune stator resistance, and inductance of the motor. These are used to
calculate the current loop gains, and at the end of the test the values
in Pr 0.38 and Pr 0.39 are updated. This test takes approximately
20s to complete.
• Set Pr 0.40 = 2
• Close the run signal (terminal 26 or 27).
• Close the Drive Enable signal (terminal 31). The lower display will
flash ‘Auto’ and ‘tunE’ alternatively, while the drive is performing the
test.
• Wait for the drive to display ‘rdy’ or ‘inh’, and for the motor to come
to a standstill.
If the drive trips, see Chapter 9 Diagnostics on page 45.
Italiano
Save

8 Advanced parameters
English
Figure 8-1 shows the overall block diagram of the drive.

For individual Menu logic diagrams, refer to section 10.14 on page 304.
Figure 8-1
Menu 8 Menu 6 Menu 13

Français Deutsch
Digital I/O Sequencer Position

and clock control
Menu 1 Menu 3
Menu 7 Menu 2 Freq. slaving,
Frequency/
Analog I/O Ramps Speed f/b &
speed ref
control
Menu 4
Menu 5
Torque/current
Motor control
control
Italiano
Menu 0 Menu 9 Menu 10 Menu 11

Basic Programmable Status and General
parameters logic trips drive set-up

Threshold User PID Solutions Solutions
detectors controller Module 1 set-up Module 2 set-up

Solutions Application Application Application
Module 3 set-up Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3
Menu 21 Menu 22
Second motor Additional
parameters Menu 0 set-up

9 Diagnostics
English
Table 9-1 Trip indications
Trip Diagnosis
br.th Internal braking resistor thermistor temperature monitoring fail (size 0 only)
If no internal brake resistor is fitted, set Pr 0.51 (or Pr 10.37) to 8 to disable this trip.
If an internal brake resistor is fitted:
10 • Ensure that the internal braking resistor thermistor is connected correctly
Français Deutsch
• Ensure that the fan in the drive is working correctly
• Replace the internal braking resistor
C.Acc SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD Read / Write fail
Check SMARTCARD is fitted / located correctly
185
Replace SMARTCARD
SMARTCARD trip: The menu 0 parameter modification cannot be saved to the
C.boot
SMARTCARD because the necessary file has not been created on the SMARTCARD
A write to a menu 0 parameter has been initiated via the keypad with Pr 11.42 set to auto(3) or
boot(4), but the necessary file on the SMARTCARD has not bee created
177 Ensure that Pr 11.42 is correctly set and reset the drive to create the necessary file on the
SMARTCARD
Re-attempt the parameter write to the menu 0 parameter
SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD can not perform the required function as it is being
C.bUSY
accessed by a Solutions Module
Wait for the Solutions Module to finish accessing the SMARTCARD and then re-attempt the
178
required function
C.Chg SMARTCARD trip: Data location already contains data
Erase data in data location
179
Write data to an alternative data location
SMARTCARD trip: The values stored in the drive and the values in the data block on the
C.cPr
SMARTCARD are different
Italiano
188 Press the red reset button
C.dAt SMARTCARD trip: Data location specified does not contain any data
183 Ensure data block number is correct
C.Err SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD data is corrupted
Ensure the card is located correctly
182 Erase data and retry
Replace SMARTCARD
C.Full SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD full
184 Delete a data block or use different SMARTCARD Español International
cL2 Analogue input 2 current loss (current mode)
28 Check analogue input 2 (terminal 7) current signal is present (4-20mA, 20-4mA)
cL3 Analogue input 3 current loss (current mode)
29 Check analogue input 3 (terminal 8) current signal is present (4-20mA, 20-4mA)
CL.bit Trip initiated from the control word (Pr 6.42)
35 Disable the control word by setting Pr 6.43 to 0 or check setting of Pr 6.42
ConF.P The number of power modules fitted no longer matches the value stored in Pr 11.35
Ensure that all power modules are correctly connected
111 Ensure that all power modules have powered up correctly
Ensure that the value in Pr 11.35 matches the number of power modules connected
SMARTCARD trip: Solutions Modules fitted are different between source drive and
C.OPtn
destination drive
Ensure correct Solutions Modules are fitted
180 Ensure Solutions Modules are in the same Solutions Module slot
Press the red reset button

English
Trip Diagnosis
SMARTCARD trip: The data blocks on the SMARTCARD are not compatible with this
C.Prod
product
Erase all data on the SMARTCARD by setting Pr xx.00 to 9999 and pressing the red reset
175 button
Replace SMARTCARD
C.rdo SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD has the Read Only bit set
Enter 9777 in Pr xx.00 to allow SMARTCARD Read / Write access
181
Ensure card is not writing to data locations 500 to 999
Français Deutsch
SMARTCARD trip: The voltage and/or current rating of the source and destination drives
C.rtg
are different
Drive rating dependent parameters (parameters with the RA coding) are likely to have different
values and ranges with drives of different voltage and current ratings. Parameters with this
attribute will not be transferred to the destination drive by SMARTCARDs when the rating of the
destination drive is different from the source drive and the file is a parameter file. However, with
software V01.09.00 and later dDrive rating dependent parameters will be transferred if only the
current rating is different and the file is a differences from default type file.
Press the red reset button
Drive rating parameters are:
Parameter Function
2.08 Standard ramp voltage
4.05/6/7, 21.27/8/9 Current limits
4.24 User current maximum scaling
186 5.07, 21.07 Motor rated current
5.09, 21.09 Motor rated voltage
5.10, 21.10 Rated power factor
5.17, 21.12 Stator resistance
Italiano
5.18 Switching frequency

5.23, 21.13 Voltage offset
5.24, 21.14 Transient inductance
5.25, 21.24 Stator inductance
6.06 DC injection braking current
6.48 Mains loss ride through detection level
The above parameters will be set to their default values.
C.TyP SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD parameter set not compatible with drive
Press the reset button

187
Ensure destination drive type is the same as the source parameter file drive type
dESt Two or more parameters are writing to the same destination parameter
199 Set Pr xx.00 = 12001 check all visible parameters in the menus for duplication
EEPROM data corrupted - Drive mode becomes open loop and serial comms will timeout
EEF
with remote keypad on the drive RS485 comms port.
31 This trip can only be cleared by loading default parameters and saving parameters
Enc1 Drive encoder trip: Encoder power supply overload
Check encoder power supply wiring and encoder current requirement
189
Maximum current = 200mA @ 15V, or 300mA @ 8V and 5V
Enc2 Drive encoder trip: Wire break (Drive encoder terminals 1 & 2, 3 & 4, 5 & 6)
Check cable continuity
Check wiring of feedback signals is correct
Check encoder power is set correctly
190
Replace feedback device
If wire break detection on the main drive encoder input is not required, set Pr 3.40 = 0 to disable
the Enc2 trip
46 Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1

Unidrive SP Short Form Guide
Trip Diagnosis
English
Enc3 Drive encoder trip: Phase offset incorrect whilst running
Check the encoder signal for noise
Check encoder shielding
191
Check the integrity of the encoder mechanical mounting
Repeat the offset measurement test
Enc4 Drive encoder trip: Feedback device comms failure
Ensure encoder power supply is correct
Ensure baud rate is correct
192
Check encoder wiring
Français Deutsch
Enc5 Drive encoder trip: Checksum or CRC error
Check the encoder signal for noise
Check the encoder cable shielding
193
With EnDat encoders, check the comms resolution and/or carry out the auto-configuration Pr
3.41
Enc6 Drive encoder trip: Encoder has indicated an error
194
With SSI encoders, check the wiring and encoder supply setting
Enc7 Drive encoder trip: Initialisation failed
Re-set the drive
Check the correct encoder type is entered into Pr 3.38
Check encoder wiring
195
Check encoder power supply is set correctly
Carry out the auto-configuration Pr 3.41
Enc8 Drive encoder trip: Auto configuration on power up has been requested and failed
Change the setting of Pr 3.41 to 0 and manually enter the drive encoder turns (Pr 3.33) and the
196 equivalent number of lines per revolution (Pr 3.34)
Check the comms resolution
Drive encoder trip: Position feedback selected is selected from a Solutions Module slot
Enc9
which does not have a speed / position feedback Solutions Module fitted
Italiano
197 Check setting of Pr 3.26 (or Pr 21.21 if the second motor parameters have been enabled)
Drive encoder trip: Servo mode phasing failure because encoder phase angle (Pr 3.25 or
Enc10
Pr 21.20) is incorrect
Check the encoder wiring.
Perform an autotune to measure the encoder phase angle or manually enter the correct phase
angle into Pr 3.25 (or Pr 21.20).
198 Spurious Enc10 trips can be seen in very dynamic applications. This trip can be disabled by
setting the overspeed threshold in Pr 3.08 to a value greater than zero. Caution should be used in
setting the over speed threshold level as a value which is too large may mean that an encoder
fault will not be detected. Español International
Drive encoder trip: A failure has occurred during the alignment of the analogue signals of
a SINCOS encoder with the digital count derived from the sine and cosine waveforms and
Enc11
the comms position (if applicable). This fault is usually due to noise on the sine and
cosine signals.
Check encoder cable shield.
161
Examine sine and cosine signals for noise.
Drive encoder trip: Hiperface encoder - The encoder type could not be identified during
Enc12
auto-configuration
Check encoder type can be auto-configured.
162 Check encoder wiring.
Enter parameters manually.
Drive encoder trip: EnDat encoder - The number of encoder turns read from the encoder
Enc13
during auto-configuration is not a power of 2
163 Select a different type of encoder.
Drive encoder trip: EnDat encoder - The number of comms bits defining the encoder
Enc14
position within a turn read from the encoder during auto-configuration is too large.
Select a different type of encoder.
164
Faulty encoder.

English
Trip Diagnosis
Drive encoder trip: The number of periods per revolution calculated from encoder data
Enc15
during auto-configuration is either less than 2 or greater than 50,000.
Linear motor pole pitch / encoder ppr set up is incorrect or out of parameter range
165 i.e. Pr 5.36 = 0 or Pr 21.31 = 0.
Faulty encoder.
Drive encoder trip: EnDat encoder - The number of comms bits per period for a linear
Enc16
encoder exceeds 255.
166
Faulty encoder.
Français Deutsch
Drive encoder trip: The periods per revolution obtained during auto-configuration for a
Enc17
rotary SINCOS encoder is not a power of two.
167
Faulty encoder.
ENP.Er Data error from electronic nameplate stored in selected position feedback device
176 Replace feedback device
Et External trip from input on terminal 31
Check terminal 31 signal
Check value of Pr 10.32
6
Enter 12001 in Pr xx.00 and check for parameter controlling Pr 10.32
Ensure Pr 10.32 or Pr 10.38 (=6) are not being controlled by serial comms
HF01 Data processing error: CPU address error
Hardware fault - return drive to supplier
HF02 Data processing error: DMAC address error
HF03 Data processing error: Illegal instruction
HF04 Data processing error: Illegal slot instruction
Italiano
HF05 Data processing error: Undefined exception

HF06 Data processing error: Reserved exception
HF07 Data processing error: Watchdog failure
HF08 Data processing error: Level 4 crash
HF09 Data processing error: Heap overflow

HF10 Data processing error: Router error
HF11 Data processing error: Access to EEPROM failed
HF12 Data processing error: Main program stack overflow
HF13 Data processing error: Software incompatible with hardware
Hardware or software fault - return drive to supplier
HF17 Multi-module system thermistor open or short circuit
217 Hardware fault - return drive to supplier
HF18 Multi-module system interconnect cable error

Trip Diagnosis
English
HF19 Temperature feedback multiplexing failure, or thermistor is open or short circuit
HF20 Power stage recognition: serial code error
HF21 Power stage recognition: unrecognised frame size
HF22 Power stage recognition: multi module frame size mismatch
Français Deutsch
HF23 Power stage recognition: multi module voltage rating mismatch
HF24 Power stage recognition: unrecognised drive size
HF25 Current feedback offset error
Soft start relay failed to close, soft start monitor failed or braking IGBT short circuit at
HF26
power up
HF27 Power stage thermistor 1 fault
HF28 Power stage thermistor 2 fault or internal fan fault (size 3)
HF29 Control board thermistor fault
HF30 DCCT wire break trip from power module
Internal capacitor bank fan failure (size 4 and larger) or a module has not powered up in a
Italiano
HF31
multi-module parallel drive
Check the AC or DC power supply to all modules in a multi-module parallel drive
231
If the AC or DC power supply is present then it is a hardware fault - return drive to the supplier
HF32 Power stage - Identification and trip information serial code error
232 Hardware fault - return drive to the supplier
It.AC Output current overload timed out (I2t) - accumulator value can be seen in Pr 4.19
Ensure the load is not jammed / sticking
Check the load on the motor has not changed
If seen during an autotune in servo mode, ensure that the motor rated current Pr 0.46 (Pr 5.07) or Español International
20 Pr 21.07 is ≤Heavy Duty current rating of the drive
Tune the rated speed parameter (closed loop vector only)
Check feedback device signal for noise
Check the feedback device mechanical coupling
It.br Braking resistor overload timed out (I2t) – accumulator value can be seen in Pr 10.39
Ensure the values entered in Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 are correct
Increase the power rating of the braking resistor and change Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31
19
If an external thermal protection device is being used and the braking resistor software overload
is not required, set Pr 10.30 or Pr 10.31 to 0 to disable the trip
L.SYnC Drive failed to synchronise to the supply voltage in Regen mode
39 Refer to the Diagnostics chapter in the Unidrive SP Regen Installation Guide.
O.CtL Drive control board over temperature
Check cubicle / drive fans are still functioning correctly
Check cubicle ventilation paths
23 Check cubicle door filters
Check ambient temperature
Reduce drive switching frequency

English
Trip Diagnosis
O.ht1 Power device over temperature based on thermal model
Reduce duty cycle
21
Decrease acceleration / deceleration rates
Reduce motor load
O.ht2 Heatsink over temperature
Check cubicle door filters
Français Deutsch
Increase ventilation
22
Reduce duty cycle
Reduce motor load
Oht2.P Power module heatsink over temperature
105
Reduce duty cycle
Reduce motor load
O.ht3 Drive over-temperature based on thermal model
The drive will attempt to stop the motor before tripping. If the motor does not stop in 10s the drive
trips immediately.
27 Check cubicle door filters
Italiano
Reduce duty cycle

Reduce motor load
Power module rectifier over temperature or input snubber resistor over temperature (size
Oht4.P
4 and above)
Check for supply imbalance
Check for supply disturbance such as notching from a DC drive
102

Reduce duty cycle
Reduce motor load
OI.AC Instantaneous output over current detected: peak output current greater than 225%
Acceleration /deceleration rate is too short.
If seen during autotune reduce voltage boost Pr 5.15
Check for short circuit on output cabling
Check integrity of motor insulation
Check feedback device wiring
Check feedback device mechanical coupling
3 Check feedback signals are free from noise
Is motor cable length within limits for that frame size?
Reduce the values in speed loop gain parameters – Pr 3.10, Pr 3.11 and Pr 3.12 (closed
loop vector and servo modes only)
Has offset measurement test been completed? (servo mode only)
Reduce the values in current loop gain parameters - Pr 4.13 and Pr 4.14 (closed loop vector
and servo modes only)

Trip Diagnosis
English
OIAC.P Power module over current detected from the module output currents
Acceleration /deceleration rate is too short.
If seen during autotune reduce voltage boost Pr 5.15
Check for short circuit on output cabling
Check integrity of motor insulation
Check feedback device wiring
Check feedback device mechanical coupling
104 Check feedback signals are free from noise
Is motor cable length within limits for that frame size?
Reduce the values in speed loop gain parameters – Pr 3.10, Pr 3.11 and Pr 3.12 (closed
Français Deutsch
loop vector and servo modes only)
Has offset measurement test been completed? (servo mode only)
Reduce the values in current loop gain parameters - Pr 4.13 and Pr 4.14 (closed loop vector and
servo modes only)
Braking transistor over-current detected: short circuit protection for the braking transistor
OI.br
activated
Check braking resistor wiring
4 Check braking resistor value is greater than or equal to the minimum resistance value
Check braking resistor insulation
OIbr.P Power module braking IGBT over current
Check braking resistor wiring
103 Check braking resistor value is greater than or equal to the minimum resistance value
Check braking resistor insulation
OIdC.P Power module over current detected from IGBT on state voltage monitoring
Vce IGBT protection activated.
109
Check motor and cable insulation.
Digital output overload: total current drawn from 24V supply and digital outputs exceeds
O.Ld1
200mA
26 Check total load on digital outputs (terminals 24,25,26)and +24V rail (terminal 22)
O.SPd Motor speed has exceeded the over speed threshold
Increase the over speed trip threshold in Pr 3.08 (closed loop modes only)
Italiano
7 Speed has exceeded 1.2 x Pr 1.06 or Pr 1.07 (open loop mode)
Reduce the speed loop P gain (Pr 3.10) to reduce the speed overshoot (closed loop modes only)
DC bus voltage has exceeded the peak level or the maximum continuous level for 15
OV
seconds
Increase deceleration ramp (Pr 0.04)
Decrease braking resistor value (staying above the minimum value)
Check nominal AC supply level
Check for supply disturbances which could cause the DC bus to rise – voltage overshoot after
supply recovery from a notch induced by DC drives.
Check motor insulation
2 Español International
Drive voltage rating Peak voltage Maximum continuous voltage level (15s)
200 415 410
400 830 815
575 990 970
690 1190 1175
If the drive is operating in low voltage DC mode the overvoltage trip level is 1.45 x Pr 6.46.

English
Trip Diagnosis
Power module DC bus voltage has exceeded the peak level or the maximum continuous
OV.P
level for 15 seconds
Increase deceleration ramp (Pr 0.04)
Decrease braking resistor value (staying above the minimum value)
Check nominal AC supply level
Check for supply disturbances which could cause the DC bus to rise – voltage overshoot after
supply recovery from a notch induced by DC drives.
Check motor insulation
106
Drive voltage rating Peak voltage Maximum continuous voltage level (15s)
200 415 410
Français Deutsch
400 830 815

575 990 970
690 1190 1175
If the drive is operating in low voltage DC mode the overvoltage trip level is 1.45 x Pr 6.46.
Keypad has been removed when the drive is receiving the speed reference from the
PAd
keypad
Fit keypad and reset
34
Change speed reference selector to select speed reference from another source
PH AC voltage input phase loss or large supply imbalance detected
Ensure all three phases are present and balanced
Check input voltage levels are correct (at full load)
32 NOTE N
Load level must be between 50 and 100% for the drive to trip under phase loss
conditions. The drive will attempt to stop the motor before this trip is initiated.
PH.P Power module phase loss detection
Ensure all three phases are present and balanced
107
Check input voltage levels are correct (at full load)
PS Internal power supply fault
Remove any Solutions Modules and reset
5 Check integrity of interface ribbon cables and connections (size 4,5,6 only)
Italiano
PS.10V 10V user power supply current greater than 10mA

Check wiring to terminal 4
8
Reduce load on terminal 4
PS.24V 24V internal power supply overload
The total user load of the drive and Solutions Modules has exceeded the internal 24V power
supply limit.
The user load consists of the drive’s digital outputs, the SM-I/O Plus digital outputs, the drive’s
9 main encoder supply and the SM-Universal Encoder Plus encoder supply.
• Reduce load and reset
• Provide an external 24V >50W power supply
• Remove any Solutions Modules and reset

PS.P Power module power supply fail
Remove any Solutions Modules and reset
108 Check integrity of interface ribbon cables and connections (size 4,5,6 only)
PSAVE.Er Power down save parameters in the EEPROM are corrupt
Indicates that the power was removed when power down save parameters were being saved.
The drive will revert back to the power down parameter set that was last saved successfully.
37
Perform a user save (Pr xx.00 to 1000 or 1001 and reset the drive) or power down the drive
normally to ensure this trip does or occur the next time the drive is powered up.
Failure to measure resistance during autotune or when starting in open loop vector mode
rS
0 or 3
33 Check motor power connection continuity
SAVE.Er User save parameters in the EEPROM are corrupt
Indicates that the power was removed when user parameters were being saved.
The drive will revert back to the user parameter set that was last saved successfully.
36
Perform a user save (Pr xx.00 to 1000 or 1001 and reset the drive) to ensure this trip does or
occur the next time the drive is powered up.

Trip Diagnosis
English
SCL Drive RS485 serial comms loss to remote keypad
Refit the cable between the drive and keypad
Check cable for damage
30
Replace cable
Replace keypad
SLX.dF Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module type fitted in slot X changed
204, 209,
Save parameters and reset
214
SLX.Er Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module in slot X has detected a fault
Français Deutsch
202, 207, Check value in Pr 15/16/17.50. See the Diagnostics section in the relevant Solutions Module
212 User Guide for more information.
SLX.HF Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module X hardware fault
200, 205, Ensure Solutions Module is fitted correctly
210 Return Solutions Module to supplier
SLX.nF Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module has been removed
Ensure Solutions Module is fitted correctly
203, 208,
Re-fit Solutions Module
213
Save parameters and reset drive
Solutions Module trip: Drive mode has changed and Solutions Module parameter routing
SL.rtd
is now incorrect
Press reset.
215
If the trip persists, contact the supplier of the drive.
SLX.tO Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module watchdog timeout
201,206,21 Press reset.
1 If the trip persists, contact the supplier of the drive.
t038 User trip defined in 2nd processor Solutions Module code
38 SM-Applications program must be interrogated to find the cause of this trip
t040 to t089 User trip defined in 2nd processor Solutions Module code
Italiano
40 to 89 SM-Applications program must be interrogated to find the cause of this trip
t112 to t160 User trip defined in 2nd processor Solutions Module code
t168 to t174 User trip defined in 2nd processor Solutions Module code Español International
th Motor thermistor trip
Check motor temperature
24 Check thermistor continuity
Set Pr 7.15 = VOLt and reset the drive to disable this function
thS Motor thermistor short circuit
Check motor thermistor wiring
25 Replace motor / motor thermistor
Set Pr 7.15 = VOLt and reset the drive to disable this function
tunE* Autotune stopped before completion
The drive has tripped out during the autotune
18 The red stop key has been pressed during the autotune
The secure disable signal (terminal 31) was active during the autotune procedure

English
Trip Diagnosis
The position feedback did not change or required speed could not be reached during the
tunE1*
inertia test (see Pr 5.12)
Ensure the motor is free to turn i.e. brake was released
Check feedback device wiring is correct
11 Ensure that Pr 3.26 is set correctly
Check feedback parameters are set correctly
Check encoder coupling to motor
Position feedback direction incorrect or motor could not be stopped during the inertia test
tunE2*
(see Pr 5.12)
Français Deutsch
Check motor cable wiring is correct

12 Check feedback device wiring is correct
Swap any two motor phases (closed loop vector only)
Drive encoder commutation signals connected incorrectly or measured inertia out of
tunE3*
range (see Pr 5.12)
Check motor cable wiring is correct
13
Check feedback device U,V and W commutation signal wiring is correct
tunE4* Drive encoder U commutation signal fail during an autotune
Check feedback device U phase commutation wires continuity
14
Replace encoder
tunE5* Drive encoder V commutation signal fail during an autotune
Check feedback device V phase commutation wires continuity
15
Replace encoder
tunE6* Drive encoder W commutation signal fail during an autotune
Check feedback device W phase commutation wires continuity
16
Replace encoder
tunE7* Motor number of poles set incorrectly
Check lines per revolution for feedback device
17
Check the number of poles in Pr 5.11 is set correctly
Unid.P Power module unidentified trip
Check all interconnecting cables between power modules
Italiano
110
Ensure cables are routed away from electrical noise sources
UP ACC Onboard PLC program: cannot access Onboard PLC program file on drive
Disable drive - write access is not allowed when the drive is enabled
98
Another source is already accessing Onboard PLC program - retry once other action is complete
UP div0 Onboard PLC program attempted divide by zero
90 Check program
Onboard PLC program variables and function block calls using more than the allowed
UP OFL
RAM space (stack overflow)
95 Check program
UP ovr Onboard PLC program attempted out of range parameter write

94 Check program
UP PAr Onboard PLC program attempted access to a non-existent parameter
91 Check program
UP ro Onboard PLC program attempted write to a read-only parameter
92 Check program
UP So Onboard PLC program attempted read of a write-only parameter
93 Check program
UP udF Onboard PLC program un-defined trip
97 Check program
UP uSEr Onboard PLC program requested a trip
96 Check program

Trip Diagnosis
English
UV DC bus under voltage threshold reached
Check AC supply voltage level
Drive voltage rating (Vac) Under voltage threshold (Vdc) UV reset voltage (Vdc)
1 200 175 215
400 350 425
575 & 690 435 590
Alarm indications
In any mode an alarm flashes alternately with the data displayed on the 2nd row when
one of the following conditions occur. If action is not taken to eliminate any alarm except
Français Deutsch
"Autotune", "Lt" and "PLC" the drive may eventually trip. Alarms flash once every 640ms
except "PLC" which flashes once every 10s. Alarms are not displayed when a
parameter is being edited.
Table 9-2 Alarm indications
Lower display Description
br.rS Braking resistor overload
Braking resistor I2t accumulator (Pr 10.37) in the drive has reached 75.0% of the value at which the drive will trip
and the braking IGBT is active.
Hot Heatsink or control board or inverter IGBT over temperature alarms are active
• The drive heatsink temperature has reached a threshold and the drive will trip O.ht2 if the temperature
continues to rise (see the O.ht2 trip).
Or
• The ambient temperature around the control PCB is approaching the over temperature threshold (see the
O.CtL trip).
OVLd Motor overload
The motor I2t accumulator in the drive has reached 75% of the value at which the drive will be tripped and the
load on the drive is >100%
Italiano
Auto tune Autotune in progress
The autotune procedure has been initialised
‘Auto’ and ‘tunE’ will flash alternatively on the display.
Lt Limit switch is active
Indicates that a limit switch is active and that it is causing the motor to be stopped (i.e. forward limit switch with
forward reference etc.)
PLC Onboard PLC program is running
An Onboard PLC program is fitted and running. The lower display will flash ‘PLC’ once every 10s.

Status indications
English
Table 9-3 Status indications

Upper display Description Drive output
stage
ACt Regeneration mode active
Enabled
The regen unit is enabled and synchronised to the supply.
ACUU AC Supply loss
The drive has detected that the AC supply has been lost and is attempting to maintain the DC Enabled
Français Deutsch
bus voltage by decelerating the motor.

dc DC applied to the motor
Enabled
The drive is applying DC injection braking.
dEC Decelerating
Enabled
The drive is decelerating the motor.
inh Inhibit
The drive is inhibited and cannot be run. Disabled
The drive enable signal is not applied to terminal 31 or Pr 6.15 is set to 0.
POS Positioning
Enabled
The drive is positioning/orientating the motor shaft.
rdY Ready
Disabled
The drive is ready to be run.
run Running
Enabled
The drive is running.
SCAn Scanning
Enabled
Regen> The drive is enabled and is synchronising to the line.
StoP Stop or holding zero speed
The drive is holding zero speed.
Italiano
Enabled
Regen> The drive is enabled but the AC voltage is too low, or the DC bus voltage is still
rising or falling.
triP Trip condition
The drive has tripped and is no longer controlling the motor. The trip code appears on the Disabled
upper display.
Table 9-4 Solutions Module and SMARTCARD status indications at power-up

Ligne
d’affichage Description
inférieure
boot
Un paramétrage est transféré de la SMARTCARD au variateur pendant la mise sous tension.
cArd
Le variateur écrit le paramétrage sur la SMARTCARD au cours de la mise sous tension.
loAding
Le variateur écrit des informations pour un Module Solutions.

Information Information Information Information Started the motor parameters Information
10 Multingual Appendix
English
10.1 Ratings / Caractéristiques nominales / Nennwerte /
Valori nominali / Valores nominales
Cable size
Input Dimensions des câbles Normal Duty Heavy Duty
Fuse
Entrée Kabelquerschnitt Surcharge faible Surcharge forte
Fusible
Eingäng Dimensione cavo Betrieb mit normaler Betrieb mit erhöhter
Sicherungen
Ingresso Tamaño de cable Überlast Überlast (150%)
Français Deutsch
Fusibile
Entrada Servizio normale Servizio gravoso
EN60204 UL508C
Amperaje normal Gran amperaje
1ph 3ph IEC gG UL I/P* O/P** I/P* O/P**
A A A A mm2 mm2 AWG AWG A*** kW hp A*** kW hp
SP0201 5.0 3.6 6 10 0.75 0.75 16 24 2.2 0.37 0.5
SP0202 7.6 5.6 10 10 1 0.75 16 22 3.1 0.55 0.75
SP0203 9.6 6.9 12 16 1.5 0.75 14 20 4.0 0.75 1.0
SP0204 13.5 8.9 16 20 2.5 0.75 12 18 5.7 1.1 1.5
SP0205 17.4 12.3 20 20 4 0.75 12 18 7.5 1.5 2.0
SP0401 2.3 4 10 0.75 0.75 16 24 1.3 0.37 0.5
SP0402 2.8 4 10 0.75 0.75 16 24 1.7 0.55 0.75
SP0403 3.3 6 10 0.75 0.75 16 24 2.1 0.75 1.0
SP0404 4.4 6 10 0.75 0.75 16 22 3.0 1.1 1.5
SP0405 5.7 8 10 0.75 0.75 16 20 4.2 1.5 2.0
SP1201 9.5 10 10 1.5 1.0 14 18 5.2 1.1 1.5 4.3 0.75 1.0
SP1202 11.3 12 15 1.5 1.0 14 16 6.8 1.5 2.0 5.8 1.1 1.5
SP1203 16.4 20 20 4.0 1.0 12 14 9.6 2.2 3.0 7.5 1.5 2.0
SP1204 19.1 20 20 4.0 1.5 12 14 11 3.0 3.0 10.6 2.2 3.0
SP1401 4.8 6 8 1.0 1.0 18 22 2.8 1.1 1.5 2.1 0.75 1.0
SP1402 5.8 6 8 1.0 1.0 16 20 3.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 1.1 2.0
Italiano
SP1403 7.4 8 10 1.0 1.0 16 18 5.0 2.2 3.0 4.2 1.5 3.0
SP1404 10.6 12 15 1.5 1.0 14 16 6.9 3.0 5.0 5.8 2.2 3.0
SP1405 11 12 15 1.5 1.0 14 14 8.8 4.0 5.0 7.6 3.0 5.0
SP1406 13.4 16 15 2.5 1.5 14 14 11 5.5 7.5 9.5 4.0 5.0
SP2201 18.1 20 20 4.0 2.5 12 14 15.5 4.0 5.0 12.6 3.0 3.0
SP2202 22.6 25 25 4.0 4.0 10 10 22 5.5 7.5 17 4.0 5.0
SP2203 28.3 32 30 6.0 6.0 8 8 28 7.5 10 25 5.5 7.5
SP2401 17 20 20 4.0 2.5 12 14 15.3 7.5 10 13 5.5 10
SP2402 21.4 25 25 4.0 4.0 10 10 21 11 15 16.5 7.5 10
SP2403 27.6 32 30 6.0 6.0 8 8 29 15 20 25 11 20
SP2404 27.6 32 30 6.0 6.0 8 8 29 15 20
SP3201 43.1 50 45 16 16 6 6 42 11 15 31 7.5 10
SP3202 54.3 63 60 25 25 4 4 54 15 20 42 11 15
SP3401 36.2 40 40 10 10 6 6 35 18.5 25 32 15 25
SP3402 42.7 50 45 16 16 6 6 43 22 30 40 18.5 30
SP3403 53.5 63 60 25 25 4 4 56 30 40 46 22 30
SP3501 6.7 8 10 1.0 1.0 16 18 5.4 3.0 3.0 4.1 2.2 2.0
SP3502 8.2 10 10 1.0 1.0 16 16 6.1 4.0 5.0 5.4 3.0 3.0
SP3503 11.1 12 15 1.5 1.0 14 14 8.4 5.5 7.5 6.1 4.0 5.0
SP3504 14.4 16 15 2.5 1.5 14 14 11 7.5 10 9.5 5.5 7.5
SP3505 18.1 20 20 4.0 2.5 12 14 16 11 15 12 7.5 10
SP3506 22.2 25 25 4.0 4.0 10 10 22 15 20 18 11 15
SP3507 26.0 32 30 6.0 6.0 8 8 27 18.5 25 22 15 20
* Input / Entrée / Eingang / Ingresso / Entrada
** Output / Sortie / Ausgang / Uscita / Salida
*** Maximum continuous output current / Courant de sortie permanent / Dauerausgangsstrom / Corrente
massima di ingresso in servizio continuo / Corriente continua de entrada máxima

Option Option Cable size

English
Input Opzione Opzione Dimensions du câble

Entrée Opción 1 Opción 2**** Kabelquerschnitt Normal Duty Heavy Duty
Eingäng Fuse Fuse Dimensione cavo Cycle normal Cycle difficile
Ingresso Fusible Fusible Tamaño de cable Betrieb mit Betrieb mit erhöhter
Entrada Sicherungen Sicherungen normaler Überlast Überlast (150%)
EN60204 UL508C
Fusibile Fusibile Servizio normale Servizio gravoso
USA: HRC IEC Amperaje normal Gran amperaje
IEC
3ph Ferraz IEC gG aR I/P* O/P** I/P* O/P**
gR
HSJ UL J *****
Français Deutsch
A A A A A
mm2 AWG mm2 AWG A*** kW hp A*** kW hp
SP4201 68.9 100 90 90 160
25 3 25 3 68 18.5 25 56 15 20
SP4202 78.1 100 100 100 160
35 3 35 3 80 22 30 68 18.5 25
SP4203 99.9 125 125 125 200
70 1 70 1 104 30 40 80 22 30
SP4401 62.3 80 80 80 160
25 3 25 3 68 37 50 60 30 50
SP4402 79.6 110 110 100 200
35 2 35 2 83 45 60 74 37 60
SP4403 97.2 125 125 125 200
70 1 70 1 104 55 75 96 45 75
SP4601 26.5 63 60 32 125
4 10 4 10 22 18.5 25 19 15 20
SP4602 28.8 63 60 40 125
6 8 6 8 27 22 30 22 18.5 25
SP4603 35.1 63 60 50 125
10 8 10 8 36 30 40 27 22 30
SP4604 41 63 60 50 125
16 6 16 6 43 37 50 36 30 40
SP4605 47.9 63 60 63 125
16 6 16 6 52 45 60 43 37 50
SP4606 56.9 80 60 63 125
25 4 25 4 62 55 75 52 45 60
SP5201 142 200 175 160 200
95 2/0 95 2/0 130 37 50 105 30 40
SP5202 165 250 225 200 250
120 4/0 120 4/0 154 45 60 130 37 50
SP5401 131 200 175 160 200
95 2/0 95 2/0 138 75 100 124 55 100
SP5402 156 250 225 200 250
120 4/0 120 4/0 168 90 125 156 75 125
SP5601 82.6 125 100 90 160
35 2 35 2 84 75 100 63 55 75
SP5602 94.8 125 100 125 160
50 1 50 1 99 90 125 85 75 100
2x 2x 2x 2x
Italiano
SP6401 215 250 250 250 315 205 110 150 180 90 150
70 2/0 70 2/0
2x 2x 2x 2x
SP6402 258 315 300 300 350 236 132 200 210 110 150
120 4/0 120 4/0
2x 2x
SP6601 139 160 175 150 315 2x1 2 x 1 125 110 150 100 90 125
50 50
2x 2x
SP6602 155 160 175 160 315 2x1 2 x 1 144 132 175 125 110 150
50 50
* Input / Entrée / Eingang / Ingresso / Entrada
** Output / Sortie / Ausgang / Uscita / Salida
*** Maximum continuous output current / Courant d'entrée maximum permanent / Dauerausgangsstrom /
Corrente massima di ingresso in servizio continuo / Corriente continua de entrada máxima

**** Semiconductor fuse in series with HRC fuse or breaker / Fusible semi-conducteur en série avec fusible à
haut pouvoir de coupure ou disjoncteur / Halbleitersicherung in Reihe mit Hochleistungssicherung (HRC)
oder Unterbrecher / Fusibile a semiconduttore in serie con un fusibile HRC o un interruttore automatico /
Fusible semiconductor en serie con fusible HRC o disyuntor
*****Semiconductor fuse / Fusible semi-conducteur / Halbleitersicherung / Fusibile a semiconduttore / Fusible
semiconductor

Short term overload limits
English
The maximum percentage overload limit changes depending on the selected motor.
Variations in motor rated current, motor power factor and motor leakage inductance all
result in changes in the maximum possible overload. Typical values are shown in the
table below:
Size 0 to 5
Operating mode CL from cold CL from 100% OL from cold OL from 100%
Normal Duty overload with motor rated current
110% for 215s 110% for 5s 110% for 215s 110% for 5s
= drive rated current
Français Deutsch
Heavy Duty overload with motor rated current =
drive rated current
Heavy Duty overload with a typical 4 pole motor 200% for 28s 200% for 3s 175% for 40s 175% for 5s
Size 6
Operating mode CL from cold CL from 100% OL from cold OL from 100%
Normal Duty overload with motor rated current
= drive rated current
Heavy Duty overload with motor rated current =
drive rated current
Generally the drive rated current is higher than the matching motor rated current
allowing a higher level of overload than the default setting as illustrated by the example
of a typical 4 pole motor.
The time allowed in the overload region is proportionally reduced at very low output
frequency on some drive ratings.
NOTE The maximum overload level which can be attained is independent of the speed.
Limites de surcharge transitoire

Le pourcentage maximum de limitation de surcharge varie suivant le moteur utilisé. La
Italiano
modification des valeurs de courant nominal moteur, du facteur de puissance moteur et
l’inductance de fuite moteur affectent la surcharge maximum possible. Le tableau ci-
dessous présente les valeurs usuelles :
Tailles 1 à 5
CL à partir de OL à partir OL à partir
Mode de fonctionnement CL du froid
100% du froid de 100%
Surcharge faible avec valeur de courant nominal 110% pendant 110% pendant 110% 110%
du moteur = courant nominal du variateur 215s 5s pendant 215s pendant 5s
Surcharge forte avec valeur de courant nominal 175% pendant 175% pendant 150% 150% Español International
200% pendant 200% pendant 175% 175%
Surcharge forte avec un moteur 4 pôles
28s 3s pendant 40s pendant 5s
Taille 6
CL à partir de OL à partir OL à partir
Mode de fonctionnement CL du froid
100% du froid de 100%
Surcharge faible avec valeur de courant nominal 110% pendant 110% pendant 110% 110%
Surcharge forte avec valeur de courant nominal 150% pendant 150% pendant 129% 129%
Généralement, la valeur du courant nominal variateur est supérieure à la valeur du
courant nominal moteur correspondant, ce qui permet d’atteindre un niveau de
surcharge supérieur à celui autorisé par défaut, comme l’illustre l’exemple d’un moteur
à 4 pôles standard.
Le temps de surcharge autorisé diminue proportionnellement aux fréquences de sortie

très basses avec certains types de variateur.

English
NOTE Le niveau de surcharge maximum pouvant être atteint est indépendant de la vitesse.
Kurzzeit-Überlastgrenzen
Die in Prozent angegebene maximale Überlastgrenze hängt vom jeweiligen Motortyp
ab. Unterschiede bei Motornennstrom, Nennleistungsfaktor und Streuinduktivität des
Motors wirken sich auf die maximal mögliche Überlast aus. In der folgenden Tabelle
sind gebräuchliche Werte aufgeführt:
Baugrößen 1 bis 5
Français Deutsch
Betriebsart CL (Kaltstart) CL (100%) OL (Kaltstart) OL (100%)

Überlast im Betrieb mit normaler Überlast mit
110% für 215s 110% für 5s 110% für 215s 110% für 5s
Motornennstrom = Umrichternennstrom
Überlast im Betrieb mit erhöhter Überlast (150%)
mit Motornennstrom = Umrichternennstrom
Betrieb mit erhöhter Überlast (150%) für
herkömmliche vierpolige Motoren
Baugröße 6
Betriebsart CL (Kaltstart) CL (100%) OL (Kaltstart) OL (100%)
Überlast im Betrieb mit normaler Überlast mit
Motornennstrom = Umrichternennstrom
Überlast im Betrieb mit erhöhter Überlast (150%)
mit Motornennstrom = Umrichternennstrom
Im Allgemeinen ist der Motornennstrom geringer als der Umrichternennstrom. Damit
wird, wie hier am Beispiel eines Vierpolmotors demonstriert, ein höherer Überlastwert
als die Standardeinstellung erreicht.
Bei manchen Umrichternennwerten wird die zulässige Zeit im Überlastbereich bei einer
sehr niedrigen Ausgangsfrequenz proportional reduziert.
Italiano
HINWEIS Der maximal erreichbare Überlastwert ist von der Drehzahl unabhängig.
Limiti di sovraccarico istantaneo

Il limite percentuale massimo di sovraccarico cambia in funzione del motore
selezionato. Le variazioni della corrente nominale del motore, del fattore di potenza del
motore e dell'induttanza di dispersione del motore determinano tutte dei cambiamenti
del sovraccarico massimo possibile. I valori tipici sono indicati nella tabella di seguito:
Taglie da 1 a 5
Modo di funzionamento CL (freddo) CL (100%) OL (freddo) OL (100%)

Sovraccarico in Servizio normale con
corrente nominale del motore = corrente 110% per 215 s 110% per 5 s 110% per 215 s 110% per 5 s
nominale del convertitore
Sovraccarico in Servizio gravoso con
Sovraccarico in Servizio gravoso con un
200% per 28 s 200% per 3 s 175% per 40 s 175% per 5 s
tipico motore a 4 poli
Taglie 6
Modo di funzionamento CL (freddo) CL (100%) OL (freddo) OL (100%)
Sovraccarico in Servizio normale con
Sovraccarico in Servizio gravoso con

Generalmente, la corrente nominale del convertitore è più elevata della corrente
English
nominale d'adattamento del motore e ciò consente un maggiore livello di sovraccarico
rispetto all'impostazione di default, come mostrato dall'esempio di un tipico motore a 4
poli.
Il tempo consentito di permanenza nella regione di sovraccarico è proporzionalmente
ridotto a frequenze di uscita molto basse per i valori nominali di alcuni convertitori.
NOTA Il livello massimo di sovraccarico che può essere raggiunto è indipendente dalla velocità.
Límites de sobrecarga a corto plazo
Français Deutsch
El límite porcentual máximo de sobrecarga varía en función del motor seleccionado.
Las variaciones de intensidad nominal, factor de potencia e inductancia de fuga del
motor repercuten en la sobrecarga máxima permitida. En la tabla siguiente se muestran
los valores típicos:
Tamaños 1 a 5
CL OL
Modo de funcionamiento CL (100%) OL (100%)
(inactividad) (inactividad)
Sobrecarga de circuito de amperaje normal con
110% durante 110% durante 110% durante 110% durante
intensidad nominal del motor = intensidad 215s 5s 215s 5s
nominal del accionamiento
Sobrecarga de circuito de gran amperaje con 175% durante 175% durante 150% durante 150% durante
intensidad nominal del motor = intensidad
40s 5s 60s 8s
motor de 4 polos típico 28s 3s 40s 5s
Tamaño 6
CL OL
Modo de funcionamiento CL (100%) OL (100%)
(inactividad) (inactividad)
Sobrecarga de circuito de amperaje normal con
110% durante 110% durante 110% durante 110% durante
Italiano
intensidad nominal del motor = intensidad
165s 9s 165s 9s
intensidad nominal del motor = intensidad 60s 8s 97s 15s
Por lo general, el accionamiento presenta una intensidad nominal más alta que el motor
acoplado, lo que ofrece un nivel de sobrecarga más elevado que el valor por defecto,
como se ilustra en el ejemplo de motor de 4 polos típico.
El tiempo admitido del nivel de sobrecarga se reduce de manera proporcional a
frecuencias de salida muy bajas con la potencia nominal de algunos accionamientos. Español International
NOTA El nivel de sobrecarga máximo que puede obtenerse no depende de la velocidad.

10.2 Drive features / Caractéristiques du variateur /

English
Umrichterfunktionen / Parti costitutive del convertitore /

Funciones del accionamiento
M6
M3.5 4Nm
1Nm
LED
SMARTCARD
SMARTCARD SM 2
LED
1 B
1 A
A
0
Français Deutsch
8 SM 1
8
1-6 SM 2
SM 3
1 11 SM 1 1 11
2.5mm 2.5mm
4Nm 4Nm
C
21 31 5 1 21 31
B 10 6
3mm 15 11 3mm
4Nm 41 42 41 42 4Nm
8mm 8mm
4Nm 4Nm
M6 M3.5
4Nm 1Nm
DC DC
Pozi Pz 2 Pozi Pz 2
T20 / 6.5mm T20 / 6.5mm
/ 6.5mm / 6.5mm
1.5Nm 1.5Nm
1.5Nm 1.5Nm
D D
Italiano
1 2
AC AC
Pozi Pz 2 Pozi Pz 2
/ 6.5mm / 6.5mm
1.5Nm 1.5Nm
DC M10 nut
17mm AF
Pozi Pz 3 Pozi Pz 2
T20 / 6.5mm
/ 10mm / 6.5mm
1.5Nm
2.5Nm 1.5Nm
D
D
3
456
AC
Pozi Pz 3
/ 10mm M10 nut 2.5mm
2.5Nm 17mm AF

A. Serial comms / Communication série / serielle Kommunikation / Comunicazioni
English
seriali / Comunicaciones serie
B. Rating label / Étiquette de valeurs nominales / Nennwerte/Klassifizierungen \
Targhetta del valori nominali / Etiqueta de potencia nominal
C. Encoder / Codeur / Codificador
D. Internal EMC filter / Filtre CEM interne / Internes EMV-Filter / Filtro EMC interno /
Filtro CEM interno
10.3 Drive dimensions / Dimensions du variateur / Geräteabmessun-
Français Deutsch
gen / Misure dell'azionamento / Dimensiones del accionamiento
B C
Italiano
Size / Taille / Baugröße A B C
/ Taglie / Tamaño mm in mm in mm in
0 322 12.677 62 2.441 226 8.898
1 368 14.488 100 3.937 219 8.622
2 368 14.488 155 6.102 219 8.622
3 368 14.488 250 9.843 260 10.236 Español International
4 510 20.079 310 12.205 298 11.732
5 820 32.283 310 12.205 298 11.732
6 1131 44.528 310 12.205 298 11.732

10.4 Surface mounting / Montage en surface / Rückwandmontage /

English
Montaggio in superficie / Montaje en superficie

40.0±5.0mm
47mm (1.575±0.197in)
7.5mm 106 ±1.0mm
(1.850in) ∅6.5mm ∅6.5mm
(0.295in) 4.173 ±0.039in
(0.256in) (0.256in)
30.0mm
(1.181in)
Français Deutsch
24.5mm
(0.965in)
0 1 2
292mm 370.0±1.0mm 337.5 ±1.0mm
(11.496in) (14.567±0.039in) (13.287 ±0.039in)
∅5.4mm 6mm
(0.213in) (0.236in) ∅6.5mm ∅6.5mm
(0.256in) (0.256in)
258.6±0.5mm
Italiano
(10.181±0.020in) ∅8.5mm
∅6.5mm (0.335in)
106±1.0mm (0.256in)
(4.173±0.039in)
25.7±0.5mm
97mm (1.012±0.020in)
(3.819in)
47mm
(1.850in)
3 4 528.8±0.5mm
(20.819±0.020in)
327±1.0mm
(12.874±0.039in)
5 839.3±0.5mm
(33.043±0.020in)
6 1150.8±0.5mm
(45.307±0.020in)
∅6.5mm
(0.256in) ∅8.5mm
(0.335in)

10.5 Through-panel mounting / Montage radiateur encastré /
English
Durchsteckmontage / Montaggio a pannello passante / Montaje a
través de panel
70 ±0.3mm
(2.756 ±0.012in)
70.0±0.3mm
∅ 6.5mm
(2.756±0.012in) 35.0 ±0.15mm ∅6.5mm
(0.256in)
(1.378 ±0.006in) (0.256in)
35.0±0.15mm
(1.378±0.006in) 64.6± 0.5mm
15.6±0.5mm
Français Deutsch
93.0±0.5mm (2.543 ±0.020in)
(0.614±0.020in)
(3.661±0.020in)
148 ±0.5mm
(5.827 ±0.020in)
343.0±0.5mm 368.0±1.0mm 368.0 ±1.0mm

(13.504±0.020in) (14.488±0.039in) (14.488 ±0.039in)
294 ±0.5mm
(11.575 ±0.020in)
1 2
9.4±0.75mm 9.3 ±0.5mm

∅ 6.5mm ∅6.5mm
(0.370±0.030in) (0.366 ±0.020in)
(0.256in) (0.256in)
101.5 ±0.5mm
(3.996 ±0.020in)
258.6±0.5mm
Italiano
26.65±0.5mm (10.181±0.020in) ∅8.5mm
∅6.5mm 1.049±0.020in) (0.335in)
(0.256in)
56±0.5mm
(2.205±0.020in)
R6.5mm
(0.256in)
286.0±0.5mm
(11.260±0.020in)
236±0.5mm
(9.291±0.020in)
487.0±0.5mm 540.3±0.5mm
287±0.5mm 4 (19.173±0.020in) 4 (21.272±0.020in)
(11.299±0.020in)
797.5±0.5mm 825.6±0.5mm
5 (31.938±0.020in) 5 (33.567±0.020in)
3
1107.8±0.5mm 1161.2±0.5mm
8 ±0.3mm
6 (43.614±0.020in) 6 (45.717±0.020in)
(0.315 ±0.012in) R6.5mm

(0.256in)
∅6.5mm
(0.256in)
14.2±0.5mm
0.559±0.020in) ∅8.5mm
258.6±0.5mm (0.335in)
(10.181±0.020in)
Size 1 to 3 only: When the drive is through-panel mounted, the main terminal cover(s)
must be removed in order to provide access to the mounting holes.

Tailles 1 à 3 uniquement: Lorsque le variateur est monté sur plaque à trou de passage,
English
le(s) couvercle(s) de la borne principale doit (doivent) être retiré(s) afin de libérer l'accès
aux trous de montage.
Nur Baugrößen 1 bis 3: Bei Umrichtern in Durchsteckmontage müssen die
Klemmenabdeckungen unten entfernt werden, damit der Zugang zu den
Montagebohrungen möglich ist.
Solo taglie 1 a 3: Quando il convertitore deve essere montato a pannello passante,
occorre rimuovere il coperchio/i principale dei terminali per consentire l'accesso ai fori di
montaggio.
Français Deutsch
Sólo tamaños 1 a 3: Al montar el accionamiento a través de panel es preciso quitar las

tapas de terminal para que resulte posible acceder a los orificios de montaje.
10.6 Braking resistor values / Valeurs de résistance de freinage /

Bremswiderstandswerte / Valori del resistore di frenatura /
Valores de resistencia de frenado (40°C [104°F])
Instantaneous power rating
Puissance instantanée
*Min resist. Spitzenleistung
Model.
*Mindestwiderstand Potenza istantanea nominale
Potencia nominal momentánea
Ω kW
SP0201 ~ SP0205 29 5.3
SP0401 ~ SP0405 75 8.1
SP1201 ~ SP1203 43 3.5
SP1204 29 5.3
Italiano
SP1401 ~ SP1404 74 8.3

SP1405 ~ SP1406 58 10.6
SP2201 - SP2203 18 8.9
SP2401 ~ SP2404 19 33.1
SP3201 ~ SP3202 5.0 30.3
SP3401 ~ SP3403 18 35.5
SP3501 ~ SP3507 18 50.7
SP4201 ~ SP4203 5.0 30.3

SP4401 ~ SP4402 11 55.3
SP4403 9 67.6
SP4601 ~ SP4606 13 95.0
SP5201 ~ SP5202 2.9 53
SP5401 ~ SP5402 7 86.9
SP5601 ~ SP5602 10 125.4
SP6401 ~ SP6402 5 121.7
SP6601 ~ SP6602 10 125.4
* Resistor tolerance / Tolérance de la résistance / Widerstandstoleranz / Tolleranza del

resistore / Tolerancia de la resistencia: ±10%

10.7 Fitting of IP54 insert / Montage de la protection IP54 /
English
Einbau der IP54-Abdeckung / Installazione dell'inserto IP54 /
Instalación de la pieza de contacto IP54
3 3
1 1 2 2 2
Français Deutsch
1
4
5 4
5
6
7
Italiano
8 9 6
6. The gasket can be found in the accessories box. 4. The IP54 insert can be found in the accessories box.
Le joint est fourni dans le jeu d’accessories. La piéce IP54 est fourni dans le jeu d’accessories.
Die Dichtung befindet sich im Zubehörsatz. Die IP54-Abdeckung befindet sich im Zubehörsatz.
La guarmizione può essere trovata nella scatola L’inserto IP54 può essere trovata nella scatola accessori.
accessori. La pieza de contacto IP54 se suministra en la caja
La junta se suministra en la caja de accesorios. de accesorios.

10.8 External EMC filter / Filtre CEM externe / Externes EMV-

English
Filter / Filtro EMC esterno / Filtro CEM externo

Schaffner Epcos
No. L1, L2, L3 No. L1, L2, L3
1 ph
SP0201
SP0202 2 0.8 N m 4mm2 0.8 N m
SP0203 4200-6000 4mm
Français Deutsch
12AWG (0.6 lb ft) 12AWG (0.6 lb ft)

SP0204
SP0205
3 ph
SP0201
SP0202
SP0203 4200-6001 4mm2 0.8 N m 4mm2 0.8 N m
SP0204
SP0205
SP0401
SP0402
SP0403 4200-6002 4mm2 0.8 N m 4mm2 0.8 N m
SP0404
SP0405
SP1201 4mm2 0.8 N m 3.5 N m 2 0.6 N m 3.0 N m
4200-6118 M5 4200-6121 4mm M5
SP1202 12AWG (0.6 lb ft) (2.6 lb ft) 12AWG (0.4 lb ft) (2.2 lb ft)
SP1203 2 0.8 N m 3.5 N m 2 0.6 N m 3.0 N m
4200-6119 4mm M5 4200-6120 4mm M5
SP1401
SP1402
4200-6118 4mm2 0.8 N m M5
3.5 N m
4200-6121 4mm
2 0.6 N m
M5
3.0 N m
Italiano
SP1404
SP1405 4mm2 0.8 N m 3.5 N m 2 0.6 N m 3.0 N m
4200-6119 M5 4200-6120 4mm M5
SP2201
SP2202 4200-6210 10mm2 2Nm
M5
3.5 N m
4200-6211 10mm
2 1.35 N m
M5
3.0 N m
8AWG (1.5 lb ft) (2.6 lb ft) 8AWG (1.0 lb ft) (2.2 lb ft)
SP2203
SP2401
SP2402
4200-6210 10mm2 2Nm
M5
3.5 N m
4200-6211 10mm
2 1.35 N m
M5
3.0 N m
SP2404
SP3201 16mm2 2.2 N m 3.9 N m 2 2.2 N m 5.1 N m
4200-6307 M6 4200-6306 16mm M6
SP3401
SP3402 4200-6305 16mm2 2.2 N m
M6
3.9 N m
4200-6306 16mm
2 2.2 N m
M6
5.1 N m
SP3403
SP3501
SP3502
SP3503
SP3504 4200-6309 16mm2 2.2 N m
M6
3.9 N m
4200-6308 16mm
2 2.2 N m
M6
5.1 N m
SP3505
SP3506
SP3507

Schaffner Epcos
English
No. L1, L2, L3 No. L1, L2, L3
SP4201
SP4202
SP4203
4200-6406 50mm2 8Nm
M10
25 N m
4200-6405 50mm
2 6.8 N m
M10
10 N m
SP4402
SP4403
SP4601
SP4602
Français Deutsch
SP4603
4200-6408 25mm2 2.3 N m
M6
3.9 N m
4200-6407 50mm
2 6.8 N m
M10
10 N m
SP4605
SP4606
SP5201
SP5202
4200-6503 95mm2 20 N m M10
25 N m
4200-6501 95mm
2 20 N m
M10
10 N m
SP5401 4/0AWG (14.7 lb ft) (18.4 lb ft) 4/0AWG (14.7 lb ft) (7.4 lb ft)
SP5402
SP5601 50mm2 8Nm 25 N m 2 20 N m 10 N m
4200-6504 M10 4200-6502 95mm M10
SP5602 0AWG (5.9 lb ft) (18.4 lb ft) 4/0AWG (14.7 lb ft) (7.4 lb ft)
SP6401 25 N m 10 N m
4200-6603 M10 4200-6601 M10
SP6402 (18.4 lb ft) (7.4 lb ft)
SP6601 25 N m 10 N m
4200-6604 M10 4200-6602 M10
SP6602 (18.4 lb ft) (7.4 lb ft)
The external EMC filters for sizes 0 to 3 can be footprint or bookcase mounted. The external EMC filters
for sizes 4 to 6 are designed to be mounted above the drive.
Les filtres CEM externes pour les tailles 0 à 3 peuvent être montés à l’arrière ou sur le côté. Les filtres
CEM externes pour les tailles 4 à 6 sont conçus pour être montés au-dessus du variateur.
Die externen EMV-Filter für die Baugrößen 0 bis drei können als Unterbau oder Seitenbau montiert
Italiano
werden. Die externen EMV-Filter für die Baugrößen 4 bis 6 sind für die Montage über dem Umrichter
konzipiert.
I filtri EMC esterni per le taglie da 0 a 3 possono essere montati a impronta o a rack. I filtri EMC esterni
per le taglie da 4 a 6 sono concepiti per essere montati al di sopra del convertitore.
En los tamaños 0 a 3, los filtros CEM externos se pueden montar en estante o en superficie de contacto.
En el caso de los tamaños 4 a 6, los filtros CEM externos están diseñados para montarse por encima del
accionamiento.
WARNING: To avoid a fire hazard and maintain validity of the UL listing, adhere to the
specified tightening torques for the power and ground terminals. Español International
AVERTISSEMENT: PAfin d’éviter tout risque d’incendie et pour assurer la conformité à la norme
UL, veuillez respecter les couples de serrage spécifiés pour les bornes de puissance et de terre.
WARNUNG: Halten Sie die für die Netz- und Erdungsanschlüsse vorgesehenen Drehmomente
ein, um Brandgefahr zu vermeiden und die Einhaltung der UL-Bestimmungen zu gewährleisten.
AVVERTENZA: Al fine di evitare pericoli d'incendio e conservare la certificazione UL, si
raccomanda si rispettare le coppie di serraggio specificate per i terminali di terra e di alimentazione.
ADVERTENCIA: A fin de evitar el riesgo de incendio y la anulación de la catalogación de UL,
asegúrese de aplicar el par de apriete específico de los terminales de alimentación y puesta a tierra.

10.9 Power connections / Raccordement de puissance / Strom-

English
versorgungsanschlüsse / Collegamenti di alimentazione /

Conexiones de alimentación
AC and DC connections / Connexions AC et CC / Wechsel- und Gleichspannung-
sanschlüsse / Collegamenti di c.a. e di c.c. / Conexiones de CA y CC
Size / Taille / Baugröße / Taglie / Tamaño 0
L1 L2 L3/N
Français Deutsch
B *
D
A
C
*This is not required if the optional
internal braking resistor is used LV DC (48V)
*Ceci n'est pas nécessaire si une
résistance de freinage interne
(option) est utilisée.
+ _
L1 L2 L3/N
*Bei Verwendung des optionalen
Kühlkörper Bremswiderstandes
ist dies nicht erforderlich
*Questo non e' richiesto se utilizzata AC

la resistenza di frenatura interna.
*Esto no es necesario
si la resistencia interna A
opcional es utilizada
Italiano
B
0
C Optional EMC filter

Filtre CEM optionnel
Optionales EMV-Filter
Filtro EMC opzionale
Filtro EMC opcional
D Optional line reactor
Self de ligne optionnel
Optionale Netzdrossel
Reattore di linea opzionale
Reactor de línea opcional
U V W DC
_ DC
+
High current -DC

-CC courant fort
Zwischenkreis
Alta corrente -c.c.
-CC de alta intensidad

Size 1 to 3 / Tailles 1 à 3 / Baugrößen 1 bis 3 / Taglie da 1 a 3 / Tamaños 1 a 3
English
1 23 A
B
A A Internal EMC filter
Filtre CEM interne
Internes EMV-Filter
Filtro EMC interno
Filtro CEM interno
Français Deutsch
48V -DC +DC BR DC1 DC2 BR 48V -DC +DC
DC1 = - DC2 = +
B
B
High current DC and braking Low current DC and 48V
Courant continu de forte intensité et freinage Courant continu de faible intensité et 48 V
Gleichspannung (Leistung) / ext. Bremswiderstand Gleichspannung (Steuerung) / +48 V
Alta corrente c.c. e frenatura Bassa corrente c.c. e 48V
CC de alta intensidad y frenado CC de baja intensidad y 48 V
DC
Bei Unidrive SP-Umrichtern der Baugröße 2 und 3 müssen für
Bremswiderstände stets die dafür vorgesehenen
Gleichspannungsanschlüsse verwendet werden. Diese stellen
On Unidrive SP size 2 and 3, the high current DC connections die Anschlussspannung für den Umrichter entweder aus dem
must always be used when using a braking resistor, supplying Gleichspannungszwischenkreis (DC-Niederspannung oder
the drive from DC (low voltage DC or high voltage DC) or DC-Hochspannung) bereit oder betreiben den Umrichter in
using the drive in a parallel DC bus system. The low current einem parallelen Zwischenkreisverbund. Der DC-
DC connection is used to connect low voltage DC to the drive Niederspannungsanschluss wird verwendet, um die DC-
internal power supply and to connect the internal EMC filter. Niederspannung mit der internen Spannungsversorgung des
Umrichters zu verbinden sowie mit dem internen EMV-Filter.
Sur l’Unidrive SP tailles 2 et 3, utilisez le bornier CC de
Negli Unidrive SP di taglia 2 e 3, utilizzare sempre i
courant élevé pour le raccordement d’une résistance de
freinage, pour alimenter le variateur en CC (CC basse tension 3 2 1 collegamenti in c.c. ad alta corrente quando si impiega un
ou tension élevée) ou pour l’alimentation CC en parallèle de resistore di frenatura, si alimenta il convertitore in corrente
plusieurs variateurs. Le raccordement CC à courant faible est continua (bassa tensione c.c. o alta tensione c.c.), oppure si
utilisé uniquement pour brancher la borne CC basse tension à usa il convertitore in un sistema di bus DC parallelo. Il
l’alimentation interne du variateur et pour brancher le filtre collegamento in c.c. a bassa corrente viene utilizzato per fornire
CEM interne. la bassa tensione c.c. all'alimentazione interna del convertitore
e per connettere il filtro EMC interno.
Italiano
En los accionamientos Unidrive SP con tamaño 2 y 3 es
indispensable emplear conexiones de CC de alta intensidad
C cuando se utiliza una resistencia de frenado, se aplica corriente
D
continua al accionamiento (de alto o bajo voltaje) o éste se
Optional EMC filter Optional line reactor AC instala en paralelo al bus de CC. La conexión de CC de baja
Filtre CEM optionnel Self de ligne optionnel intensidad sirve para conectar la corriente continua a la fuente
Optionales EMV-Filter Optionale Netzdrossel
Filtro EMC opzionale Reattore di linea opzionale 1 23 de alimentación interna del accionamiento y para conectar el
filtro CEM interno.
Filtro EMC opcional Reactor de línea opcional
PE L1 L2 L3 U V W L1 L2 L3 PE U V W
C C
D D
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3


English
L1 L2 L3
A
Français Deutsch
B A Optional line reactor

Self de ligne optionnel
Optionale Netzdrossel
Reattore di linea opzionale
Reactor de línea opcional
B Optional EMC filter

L1 L2 L3 Filtre CEM optionnel
Optionales EMV-Filter
Filtro EMC opzionale
Filtro EMC opcional
C Internal EMC filter
PE +DC -DC Filtre CEM interne
Internes EMV-Filter
Filtro EMC interno
C Filtro CEM interno
Italiano
456
Heatsink fan supply connections

Connexions de l’alimentation du ventilateur du radiateur

6 Kühlkörperlüfter-anschlussklemmen
Collegamenti di alimentazione ventola dissipatore
Conexiones de alimentación de ventilador de disipador
D
U V W
E
+DC BR
D E

10.10 Removal of internal EMC filter / Montage de l'étrier de mise à
English
la terre / Ausbau des internen EMV-Filters / Installazione del
morsetto di terra / Instalación de la brida de toma de tierra
Size 0 / Taille 0 / Baugröße 0 / Taglia 0 / Tamaño 0
Français Deutsch
2

1
2
3
Italiano
4

1

10.11 Grounding of signal cable shields using the grounding bracket

English
/ Mise à la terre des blindages du câble de commande à l’aide

du support / Erden von Signalkabelschirmungen mit Hilfe der
Erdungsklammer / Messa a terra degli schermi dei cavi dei
segnali mediante la staffa di terra / Puesta a tierra de los blind-
ajes del cable de señalización mediante la abrazadera de toma
de tierra
Français Deutsch
Italiano
When a Unidrive SP size 4 or 5 is through-panel mounted, the grounding link bracket

must be folded upwards.
1. Grounding link bracket in its surface mount position (as supplied)
2. Grounding link bracket folded up into its through-panel mount position
Lorsqu’un variateur Unidrive SP taille 4 ou 5 est monté avec radiateur encastré, le
support de mise à la terre doit être plié à la verticale.
1. Fixation de mise à la terre dans sa position de montage en surface (telle que
fournie)
2. Support de mise à la terre plié dans sa position de montage avec radiateur encastré
Wird ein Unidrive SP der Baugröße 4 oder 5 in Durchsteckmontage installiert, ist die
Erdungsklammer nach oben zu biegen.
1. Erdungsklammer bei Rückwandmontage (Auslieferungszustand)
2. Erdungsklammer (nach oben gebogen) bei Durchsteckmontage
Quando viene montato a pannello passante un Unidrive SP di taglia 4 o 5, ripiegarne
verso l'alto la staffa di collegamento a massa.
1. Staffa di collegamento a massa nella posizione per il montaggio in superficie (come
fornita)
2. Staffa di collegamento a massa ripiegata verso l'alto nella posizione per il
montaggio a pannello passante
En los accionamientos Unidrive SP de tamaño 4 ó 5 montados a través del panel, la
abrazadera de toma de tierra se tiene que doblar hacia arriba.
1. Abrazadera de toma de tierra montada en superficie (como suministrada)
2. Abrazadera de toma de tierra plegada en montaje a través de panel

English
1 2
Français Deutsch
Grounding link bracket
Fixation de mise à la terre
Erdungsklammer
Staffa di collegamento a massa
Abrazadera de puesta de tierra
Mounting bracket
Support de montage
Montageklammer
Staffa di montaggio
Soporte de montaje
10.12 Encoder / Codeur
5 1
10 6
Italiano
15 11
Term. Pr 3.38
Borne
Ab Fd Fr Ab.SErVO Fd.SErVO Fr.SErVO SC SC.HiPEr EndAt SC.EndAt SSI SC.SSI
Kl.
(0) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
1 A F F A F F Cos Cos Cos
2 A\ F\ F\ A\ F\ F\ Cosref Cosref Cosref
3 B D R B D R Sin Sin Sin Español International
4 B\ D\ R\ B\ D\ R\ Sinref Sinref Sinref
5 Z* Encoder input - Data (input/output)
6 Z\* Encoder input - Data\ (input/output)
Simulated encoder Simulated encoder
7 U
Aout, Fout** Aout, Fout**
8 U\
Aout\, Fout\** Aout\, Fout\**
9 V
Bout, Dout** Bout, Dout**
10 V\
Bout\, Dout\** Bout\, Dout\**
11 W Encoder input - Clock (output)
12 W\ Encoder input - Clock\ (output)
13 +V***
14 0V common
15 th****

***The encoder supply is ****Terminal 15 is a parallel connection to

English
**Simulated encoder
*Marker pulse selectable through parameter T8 analog input 3. If this is to be used as a
output only available
is optional configuration to 5Vdc, 8Vdc thermistor input, set Pr 7.15 to ‘th.sc’ (7),
in open-loop
and 15Vdc ‘th’ (8) or ‘th.diSP’ (9).
**** La borne 15 est connectée en
** Sortie simulation *** L’alimentation du codeur parallèle à l’entrée analogique 3 de T8. Si
*L'impulsion de
codeur disponible peut être sélectionnée par la elle doit être utilisée comme entrée de la
synchronisation
seulement en boucle configuration d’un paramètre sonde thermique, assurez-vous du
est facultative
ouverte sur 5 VCC, 8 VCC et 15 VCC réglage de Pr 7.15 sur « th.sc » (7), « th »
(8) ou « th.diSP » (9).
*** Die Stromversorgung für
Français Deutsch
** Simulierte **** Klemme 15 ist eine Parallelverbindung

den Encoder kann mit Hilfe
* Der Encoder-Ausgänge mit T8 (Analogeingang 3).
von Parameterkonfiguration
Nullimpuls ist stehen nur im Open Bei Verwendung als Thermistor-Eingang
auf 5V, 8V oder 15V
optional. Loop-Modus zur muss Pr 7.15 auf „th.sc“ (7), „th“ (8) oder
Gleichspannung eingestellt
Verfügung „th.diSP“ (9) gesetzt werden.
werden.
** L'uscita *** La tensione dell'encoder **** Il terminale 15 è un collegamento
* L'impulso di dell'encoder simulato può essere impostata, parallelo all'ingresso analogico T8 3.
riferimento è è disponibile attraverso la configurazione Se questo terminale deve essere utilizzato
opzionale unicamente in anello del parametro, a 5 V c.c., 8 V come ingresso per il termistore, impostare
aperto c.c. e a 15 V c.c. Pr 7.15 su “th.sc” (7), “th” (8) o “th.diSP” (9).
*** La alimentación del **** El terminal 15 se conecta en paralelo
** La salida del
* El impulso de codificador puede a la entrada analógica T8 3.
codificador simulada
marcado es seleccionarse configurando el Cuando se vaya a utilizar como entrada
sólo está disponible
opcional. parámetro en 5 V CC, 8 V CC del termistor, ajuste el parámetro Pr 7.15
en bucle abierto.
y 15 V CC. en ‘th.sc’ (7), ‘th’ (8) o ‘th.diSP’ (9).
10.13 Serial communications connections / Connexions de

communication série / Anschlüsse für die serielle
Kommunikation / Collegamenti delle comunicazioni seriali /
Conexiones de comunicaciones serie
The Unidrive SP has a serial communications port (serial port) as standard supporting 2
Italiano
wire EIA485 communications.

L’Unidrive SP est équipé en standard d’un port de communication série
(port série) prenant en charge les communications EIA485 à deux fils.
Der Unidrive SP besitzt standardmäßig einen seriellen Datenübertragungsanschluss
(serieller Anschluss), über den eine EIA485-Zweidrahtkommunikation möglich ist.
L'Unidrive SP è provvisto di serie di una porta per comunicazioni seriali (porta seriale)
che supporta le comunicazioni EIA485 a 2 fili.
El Unidrive SP incluye de fábrica un puerto de comunicaciones serie (puerto serie) que
permite utilizar cables de comunicación EIA485 de dos hilos.

English
1
8
Connection details for RJ45 connector / Détails pour la connexion du connecteur
RJ45 / Anschlussdaten für RJ45-Stecker / Ubicazione del connettore RJ45 per
comunic. seriali / Detalles de conexión del conector RJ45
Pin / Broche /
Function / Fonction / Funktion / Funzione / Función
Français Deutsch
Polo / Terminal
120Ω Termination resistor / Résistance de terminaison / Abschlusswiderstand / Resistore di
1
terminazione / Resistencias terminales
2 RX TX
3 0V isolated / isolé / isoliert / isolato / aislado
4 +24V (100 mA)
5 0V isolated / isolé / isoliert / isolato / aislado
6 TX enable / activation / abilitazione / activación
7 RX\ TX\
RX\ TX\ (if termination resistors are required, link to pin 1) / (si des résistances de terminaison
sont requises, liaison à la broche 1) / (falls Abschlusswiderstände benötigt werden, mit Pin 1
8
verbinden) / (se occorrono resistori di terminazione, collegare al polo 1) / (en caso de necesitar
resistencias de terminación, deben conectarse al terminal 1)
Shell / Cilíndrico 0V isolated / isolé / isoliert / isolato / aislado
The communications port applies a 2 unit load to the communications network.
Minimum number of connections are 2, 3, 7 and shield. Shielded cable must be used at
all times.
Le port de communication applique 2 unités de charge au réseau de communications.
Au minimum, les connexions 2, 3, 7 doivent être effectuées, ainsi que le blindage. Dans
tous les cas, des câbles blindés doivent être utilisés.
Italiano
Über die serielle Schnittstelle wird eine 2 Einheiten entsprechende Last an das
Datenübertragungsnetzwerk angelegt.
Es müssen mindestens die Anschlüsse der Pins 2, 3, 7 und die Abschirmung
vorgenommen werden. Es muss immer ein abgeschirmtes Kabel verwendet werden.
La porta per comunicazioni applica un carico di 2 unità alla rete delle comunicazioni.
Il numero minimo di connessioni è 2, 3, 7 e lo schermo. Il cavo schermato deve essere
sempre utilizzato.
El puerto de comunicaciones aplica una carga de 2 unidades a la red de comunicaciones. Español International
El número mínimo de conexiones es: 2, 3, 7 y blindaje. Siempre debe utilizarse cable aislado.

10.14 Advanced Parameters / Paramètres avancés / Erweiterte

English
Parameter / Parametri avanzati / Parámetros avanzados

Key / Légende / Schlüssel / Legende / Clave
Input / Entrée / Eingang / Ingresso / Comparator / Comparateur / Komparator /
Entrada Comparatore / Comparador
Output / Sortie / Ausgang / Uscita /

Salida Σ Sum / Somme / Summe / Somma / Suma
Input or output programmable X.XX

Selector controlled by Pr x.xx
Entrée ou sortie programmable Sélecteur controllé par Pr x.xx
Français Deutsch
Eingang oder Ausgang programmierbar Selektor gesteuert durch Pr x.xx

Programmabile come ingresso o uscita Selettore controllato dal Pr x.xx
Entrada o salida programable Selector controlado por Pr x.xx
RW parameter Volts to frequency conversion

Paramètre en lecture-écriture (LE) Conversion tension/fréquence
0.XX Schreib / Leseparameter V/f Spannungs- Frequenz- Wandlung
Parametro di lettura-scrittura (RW) Conversione tensione/frequenza
Parámetro de lectura y escritura (RW) Conversión voltios a frecuencia
RO parameter Analog to digital conversion

Paramètre en lecture seule (LS) Conversion analogique/numérique
0.XX Nur Leseparameter A/D Analog digital Wandlung
Parametro di sola lettura (RO) Conversione analogico/digitale
Parámetro de sólo lectura (RO) Conversión analógica a digital
Connected to ground / off

Raccordé à la terre / arrêt Modulus / Module / Modulo / Modulo /
verbunden mit 0V / aus
Collegato a massa / off Módulo
Conectado a tierra / desactivado
Comparator with hysteresis

Comparateur avec hystérésis
Invert / Inversion / Negator / Inversione /
Komparator mit Hysterese
Inversión
Comparatore con isteresi
Comparador con histéresis
Italiano
Switch controlled by Pr x.xx

X.XX
Commutateur contrôlé par Pr x.xx
& AND / ET / Y Schalter gesteuert durch Pr x.xx
Interruttore controllato dal Pr x.xx
Selector controlado por Pr x.xx
Integrate / Intégrale / Integrieren / Integrale /

OR OR / OU / O
∫ Integración
Differentiate / Différentiel / Differenzieren /

NOR NOR / NI d/dt Differenziale / Diferenciación
Summing junction
Boîte de jonction à compteurs totalisateurs
Additionsstelle Relay / Relais / Relè / Relé
Nodo somma
0V
Conexión totalizadora
Limit / Limite / Límite

English
Français Deutsch
Italiano

Menu 1: Frequency/speed reference / Référence de fréquence/vitesse /

English
Sollwertauswahl, Begrenzungen und Ausblendungen / Riferimento di frequenza/
velocità / Referencia de frecuencia/velocidad
Analog 1/2 select
28
Analog references / Référence analogique /
Analogsollwert / Riferimento analogico /
Referencia analógica
Menu 8
Analog 1
5
1.36
Français Deutsch
6
1.41 Analog 2
Menu 7 select
7 1.37
Analog 2
Preset select / Sélection prédéfinie /

Preset references / Référence prédéfinie / 1.42 Auswahl Festsollwert / Selezione
Festsollwerte / Riferimento preimpostato / preimpostato / Selec. Prefijada
Referencia prefijada
Selector / Auswahl Keypad select / Sélection clavier /
1.15 1.43 Auswahl Bedieneinheit / Selezione
da tastiera / Selec. De teclado
Select / Auswahl bits 1 ~ 3
1.47 1.46 Precision select /
1.45 1.44 Auswahl Präzisionssollwert
Reference selector
Sélecteur référence
Auswahl Sollwertquelle 1.14
Selettore riferimento Reference selected
Selector de referencia Référence sélectionnée
Gewählte Sollwertquelle
1.21 0 1.49 Selezione riferimento
Referencia seleccionada
1.22 1
1.23
1.24 2 +
1.25 3
1.26 +
1.27 4
1.28 5 % trim
Scan timer Correction du %
% Sollwertkorrektur 1.38 1.01
1.20
% compensazione riferimento
% de compensación
1.50 Pr 1.50 >1 Level of reverence
Niveau de référence
1.16
Ausgewählter
Italiano
Time / Temps / Preset selected Frequenz-/

Prédéfinie sélectionnée 1.04
Tempo / Tiempo Drehzahlsollwert
Gewählter Festsollwert Offset Livello di riferimento
Selezione preimpostato Décalage Nivel de referencia
Prefijada seleccionada Desfase
1.48 1.09
Reset / Réinitialisation / Reinicio Offset mode
Keypad reference / Référence clavier / Sollwert Mode décalage
über Bedieneinheit / Riferimento da tastiera / Sollwert-Offset
Power-up mode Modo di offset
Referencia de teclado 1.51 Modo de desfase
Mise sous tension
Sollwert nach Netz Pr 1.49 Pr 1.50 Reference being used Référence à utiliser
Ein im Modus „Pad“ 1 1 Analog reference 1 Référence analogique 1
Collegata all'alim. 1 >1 Preset reference defined by Pr 1.50 Référence prédéfinie par Pr 1.50
M Encendido 2 1 Analog reference 2 Référence analogique 2
1.17
2 >1 Preset reference defined by Pr 1.50 Référence prédéfinie par Pr 1.50
3 x Preset reference defined by Pr 1.50 Référence prédéfinie par Pr 1.50
4 x Keypad reference Référence clavier
5 x Preceision reference Référence de précision
Precision reference / Référence de précision /

Präzisionssollwert / Riferimento di precisione / Pr 1.49 Pr 1.50 Ausgewählter Sollwert Riferimento utilizzato
1 1 Analogsollwert 1 Riferimento analogico 1
Referencia de precisión 1 >1 Festsollwertauswahl durch Pr 1.50 festgelegt Riferimento preimpostato definito da Pr 1.50
Update disable / Désactivation mise à jour / 2 1 Analogsollwert 2 Riferimento analogico 2
Einfrieren / Disabilitazione aggiornamento / 2 >1 Festsollwertauswahl durch Pr 1.50 festgelegt Riferimento preimpostato definito da Pr 1.50
Desact. actualización 3 x Festsollwertauswahl durch Pr 1.50 festgelegt Riferimento preimpostato definito da Pr 1.50
4 x Sollwert über Bedieneinheit Riferimento da tastiera
1.20 5 x Präzisionssollwert
Coarse / Réglage normal Riferimento di precisione
/ Position / Approssimato Pr 1.49 Pr 1.50 Referencia utilizada
/ Aproximado 1 1 Referencia analógica 1
1 >1 Referencia prefijada definida por Pr 1.50
1.18
2 1 Referencia analógica 2
1.19 2 >1 Referencia prefijada definida por Pr 1.50
3 x Referencia prefijada definida por Pr 1.50
Fine / Réglage fin / 4 x Referencia teclado
Feinposition / Preciso 5 x Referencia de precisión

English
RUN FORWARD / MARCHE AVANT / RUN REVERSE / MARCHE ARRIÈRE /
JOG / PAS-À-PAS / TIPPEN /
RECHTSLAUF / MARCIA AVANTI / LINKSLAUF / MARCIA INVERSA /
VELOCIDAD LENTA
MARCHA ADELANTE MARCHA ATRÁS
29 26 27
Français Deutsch
Menu 6 Menu 8 Ref In skip rpm/Hz band indicator
Indicateur de référence en bande
saut de rpm/Hz
Sollwert im Ausblendbereich Drehzahlband
Jog / Pas-a-pas / Indicatore riferimento in banda
1.13 Menu 6 di salto rpm/Hz
Tippen / Velocidad
Indicador de referencia en banda de
salto de rpm/Hz
Menu 13
Ref. activated Pre-ramp reference
Bipolar ref. sel. 1.10 1.35 Référence pré-rampe
Sollwert freigegeben 1.11
Abilitazione riferimento Pre-filter ref Sollwert vor Rampe
Réf. pré-filtre Riferimento prerampa
Sollwert vor Referencia anterior a rampa
Feed-forward
Action Ausblendung
prévisionnelle 1.06 1.02 Rif. prefiltro 1.03
Reverse Drehzehlvorsteuerung Ref. prefiltro
Max. rpm / Hz
Marche Arrière
Linkslauf 1.12 1.40
Inversione
Marcha atrás Realimentación 1.07
Menu 2
positiva Min. rpm / Hz
eleccionada
[1.06]
[1.07]
[1.07]
[1.06]
x(-1)
1.29 1.31 1.33

1.39 1.08 [1.06]
_ Skip / Saut de Skip / Saut de Skip / Saut de
min rpm / Ausblend / / Ausblend / / Ausblend /
Jog ref. Velocity feed-forward ref. Salto Salto Salto
Réf. Vitesse pas-à-pas 1.05 Réf. action prévisionnelle rpm/Hz 1 rpm/Hz 2 rpm/Hz 3
Tipp- Sollwert de vitesse [1.06]
Italiano
Rif. di jog Sollwert für Drehzahlvorsteuerung 1.30 1.32 1.34
Ref. velocidad lenta Riferimento velocità feed-forward
Ref. de realimentación Skip / Saut de Skip / Saut de Skip / Saut de
positiva de velocidad [1.06] / Ausblend / / Ausblend / / Ausblend /
Salto Salto Salto
rpm/Hz 1 rpm/Hz 2 rpm/Hz 3
band(e/a) band(e/a) band(e/a)
[1.07]

Menu 2: Ramps / Rampes / Rampen / Rampe / Rampas

English
Accel. select bits / Bits de sélection du taux d'accélération /

Auswahlbits für Beschleunigungszeit / Bit di selezione tempo accelerazione /
Bits de selección de velocidad de aceleración
2.34 2.33 2.32
2.32
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0 Accel. Selector
Sélecteur du taux d'accélération
Français Deutsch
1 0 1 Selektor für Beschleunigungszeit

1 1 0 Selettore tempo accelerazione
Selector de velocidad de aceleración
1 1 1
2.10
Accel. rates 1 ~ 8
Taux d'accélération 1 ~ 8
Beschleunigungszeiten 1 ~ 8
Tempi di accelerazione 1 ~ 8
Velocidades de aceleración 1 ~ 8
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
Preset reference selected

Indicateur Référence prédéfinie sélectionnée
Gewählter Festsollwert (Anzeige) 1.50 Jog acceleration rate
Indicatore selezione riferimento preimpostato Taux d'accélération vitesse pas-à-pas
Indicador de referencia prefijada seleccionada Beschleunigungszeit Tippen
Tempo accelerazione jog
Velocidad acel. Lenta
1 2.19
2
Italiano
Jog selected
3 Indicateur Vitesse
pas-à-pas sélectionnée
4 Tippen angewählt (Anzeige) 1.13
5 Indicatore selezione jog
Indicador de velocidad
6 lenta seleccionada
7
8
Ramp control / Réglage de la rampe /
Rampensteuerung / Controllo rampa / Control de rampa
Ramp hold / Maintien rampe / Rampe Stop /
2.03
Mantenimento rampa / Retención de rampa
Pre-ramp speed reference Ramp mode select / Sélection Mode rampe /
Référence vitesse pré-rampe 2.04 Auswahl Bremsrampenmodus / Selezione modo
Sollwert vor Rampe rampa / Selec. Modo de rampa
1.03
Riferimento velocità prerampa
Referencia de velocidad 2.08

anterior a rampa
CL>

English
Decel. select bits / Bits de sélection du taux de décélération /
Auswahlbits für Verzögerungszeit / Bit di selezione tempo decelerazione
Bits de selección de velocidad de deceleración
2.37 2.36 2.35
Decel. Selector
Sélecteur du taux de décélération
Français Deutsch
Selektor für Verzögerungszeit
Selettore tempo decelerazione
Selector de velocidad de deceleración
2.20
Decel. rates 1 ~ 8
Taux de décélération 1 ~ 8
Verzögerungszeiten 1 ~ 8
Tempi di decelerazione 1 ~ 8
Velocidades de deceleración 1 ~ 8
Preset reference selected

Indicateur Référence prédéfinie sélectionnée
Jog decel. rate
1.50 Gewählter Festsollwert (Anzeige)
Taux de décél. vitesse pas-à-pas
Indicatore selezione riferimento preimpostato
Verzögerungszeit Tippen
Indicador de referencia prefijada seleccionada
Tempo decelerazione jog
Velocidad deceleración lenta
2.29
Italiano
Jog selected
Indicateur Vitesse
pas-à-pas sélectionnée
1.13 Tippen angewählt (Anzeige)
Indicatore selezione jog
Indicador de velocidad
lenta seleccionada
OL>
S-Ramp enable / Activation Rampe-S /

S-Rampe freigeben / Abilitazione rampa a S / Menu 4
2.06
Activación de rampa S Post-ramp ref.
Réf. post-rampe
Sollwert nach Rampe
S-Ramp acceleration limit / Limite d’accélération _ Rif. postrampa
Rampe-S / S-Rampe: Änderungsrate / Ref. posterior a rampa
2.07 +
Limite accelerazione rampa S / Español International
Límite de aceleración de rampa S
2.01
CL>
2.02 d/dt 2.38
Ramp enable
Activation rampe Inertia compensation torque
Rampe freigeben Couple de compensation d'inertie
Abilitazione rampa Trägheitsvorsteuerung
Activación de rampa Coppia di compensazione inerzia
Par de compensación de inercia

Menu 3: Frequency slaving, speed feedback and speed control / Fréquence du

English
bloc asservi, retour de vitesse et contrôle de la vitesse / Slave-Frequenz,
Drehzahlrückführung und Drehzahlregelung / Frequenza per applicazioni master/
slave, retroazione velocità e controllo velocità / Sincronización de frecuencia,
realimentación de velocidad y control de velocidad
OL>
Ref. destination / Destination de
Drive encoder speed réf. / Sollwert-Zielparameter /
Vitesse de l'encodeur Reference Destinazione rif. / Destino de ref.
Encoder Grundgerät: Drehzahl Référence Scaling
Velocità encoder azionamento Sollwert Mise à l'échelle 3.46
Velocidad de codificador Riferimento Sollwertskalierung
Français Deutsch
de accionamiento Referencia Scalatura ??.??

Max. encoder / Escala
3.43 codificador ref. /
3.27 rif. / sollwert 3.45 3.44
Drive encoder filter ??.??
3.42 Filtre du codeur
du variateur Slaving ratio
3.14
Umrichter-Encoder numerator
Encoder PPR filter Numérateur du rapport Frequency slaving enable
3.34 Filtro dell'encoder d'asservissement Activation de l'asservissement de fréquence
Codificador PPR
convertitore Slaving-Verhältnis: Zähler 3.13 Frequenzsignal für Slave freigeben
Encoder Encoder type / Numeratore rapporto per
Filtro de codificador Abilitazione frequenza per appl. master/slave
Codificador 3.38 typ / tipo appl. master/slave
A 1 de accionamiento Activación de sincronización de frecuencia
Tipo de codificador Numerador de coeficiente
A 2
Termination resistors 1 sincronización
B 3 Slaving ratio
Résistances de 2048 3.15
B 4 terminaison denominator 3.01
Abschluss- Dénominateur du rapport
3.39 widerstände d'asservissement
Slaving-Verhältnis: Nenner Final demand (rpm)
Resistori di Finale demandée (rpm)
terminazione Denominatore rapporto per
appl. master/slave Frequenzsollwert für Slave
Resistencias de Richiesta finale (rpm)
terminal Denominador de
Demanda final (rpm) Motor
coeficiente sincronización
Post ramp ref. Moteur
Sollwert nach Rampe Slip comp. Comp. scorrimento Motore
Rif. Postrampa Comp. de glissement Menu 5 Hz
Comp. de deslizamiento
Ref. posterior a rampa Schlupfkompensation
+
5.01
+
Menu 2 2.01
Select x2048 output

Sélection de la sortie x2048
Umrichter Ausgangsfrequenz
3.17
x 2048 am Frequenzausgang
Selezione uscita x2048
Seleccionar salida x2048
3.16 Enable frequency
slaving output 7 F (A)
Activation de la sortie de
8 F (A)
fréquence d'asservissement
Italiano
Ausgang für Frequenz- Slaving 9 D (B)

x 2048 freigeben 10 D ( B)
At zero speed indicator Abilitazione uscita frequenza per
Zero speed threshold
Indicateur Vitesse zéro atteinte appl. master/ slave
Seuille vitesse zéro
Frequenz Null erreicht Activar salida de sincronización
Schwelle für Frequenz Null
Soglia velocità zero Indicatore di velocità zero de frecuencia
Umbral de velocidad cero Indicador de velocidad cero 3.18 Select F and D output
Bipolar ref. select
3.05 + 1.10 Bipolarsollwert Sélection sorties F/D
10.03 freigeben Slave-Frequenzsignalausgänge
_
F und D aktivieren
At or below min. Selezione uscita F e D
speed indicator Seleccionar salida F y D
Min. Hz
Indicateur de
1.07 +0.5Hz + 10.04 fonctionnement à vitesse min. ou inférieure
Minimalfrequenz erreicht oder unterschritten
_ Indicatore marcia a velocità minima o inferiore
Indicador de velocidad mínima o menor
+
Overspeed trip / Disjonction de survitesse /
1.06 +20% _ Fehlerabschaltung Überdrehzahl / Allarme
sovravelocità / Desconexión por sobrevelocidad
Max. Hz (O.SPd)
Below at-speed window indicator

At speed lower limit Indicateur de fenêtre inférieure
Limite inférieure du signal vitesse atteinte
signal vitesse atteinte Unterhalb Sollwert
n = nsoll (untere Schwelle) Indicatore marcia
Pre ramp ref. Limite minimo in velocità sotto finestra in velocità
Sollwert vor Límite mínimo a Indicador de ventana a
Rampe toda velocidad menos de velocidad máxima
Rif. prerampa
3.06 +
Ref. anterior
10.05
a rampa _
_ At speed indicator
1.03 + Indicateur de vitesse atteinte
NOR 10.06 Sollwert erreicht
Indicatore marcia in velocità
Indicador de velocidad máxima
3.09
+
10.07
Absolute at-speed detect mode 3.07
_
Above at-speed window indicator
Mode Détection vitesse atteinte Indicateur de fenêtre signal vitesse atteinte
n = Nsoll, absolute Grenzen Upper limit
Limite supérieure Oberhalb Sollwert
Modo rilevamento in velocità assoluta Indicatore marcia sopra finestra in velocità
Modo de detección a velocidad untere Schwelle
Limite massimo Indicador de ventana a más de velocidad máxima
máxima absoluta
Límite máximo

English
Français Deutsch
Italiano

CL>
English
Hard speed ref. / Réf. haute vitesse /
Zusatzsollwert / Rif. velocità reale / 3.22
Ref. de velocidad fija
Hard speed ref. selector

Sélecteur réf. haute vitesse
1 0
Zusatzsollwert freigeben
Selettore rif. velocità reale 3.23
Selector de ref. de velocidad fija
Ref. enabled indicator Final speed ref.
Indicateur Réf. activée 1 0 Réf. vitesse finale
Sollwert freigegeben Resultierender Drehzahlsollwert
Indicatore abilitazione rif. 1.11
Riferimento velocità finale
Indicador de ref. activada Referencia de velocidad final
Post-ramp ref.
+
Réf. post-rampe +
Sollwert nach Rampe 2.01 3.01
Rif. postrampa
Français Deutsch
Ref. posterior a rampa
Drive encoder filter Drive encoder speed

Encoder type / typ / tipo Vitesse de l'encodeur
3.38 Filtre du codeur du variateur
Tipo de codificador Encoder Grundgerät: Drehzahl
Umrichter-Encoder filter
Encoder PPR Filtro dell'encoder convertitore Velocità encoder azionamento
3.34
Codificador PPR Filtro de codificador Velocidad de codificador
Termination resistors de accionamiento de accionamiento Speed feedback selector
Résistances de terminaison Sélecteur de la rétroaction de vitesse
3.39 Abschlusswiderstände 3.42 3.27 Selektor für Drehzahlrückführung
Resistori di terminazione Selettore retroazione velocità
Resistencias de terminal Selector de realimentación de velocidad
A Supply voltage
1 3.26
A Tension d'alimentation
2 Closed-loop vector mode
B 3.36 Versorgungsspannung SM slot 1 Mode Vectoriel Boucle fermée
3 Tensione alimentazione
B Speed feedback 0 Closed Loop-Vektormodus
4 Tensión de alimentación Rétroaction Modo vettoriale in anello chiuso
Z Phase angle / Phasenwinkel / Drehzahlrückführung
5 Modo vectorial de bucle cerrado
Z 3.25 Angolo di fase / Ángulo de fase Retroazione velocità
6
Encoder U Realimentación de 3.24
7 Position feedback link
velocidad
15.03 1
U Verrouillage rétroaction de la
8 position / Update SM slot 2
V 9 0
3.50 Positionsregister sperren Speed feedback
V 10 Retroazione della posizione Rétroaction
W 11 bloccata / Bloqueo de Drehzahlrückführung 16.03 2
realimentación de posición Retroazione velocità
W 12
Revolution counter / Compte- Realimentación de 1
3.28 tours / Umdrehungszähler / velocidad
Contagiri / Cuentarrevoluciones SM slot 3
Speed feedback
17.03 3
Rétroaction
3.29 Position / Posizione / Posición Drehzahlrückführung 2
Retroazione velocità RFC sensorless
Realimentación de speed feedback
Fine position / Feinposition / velocidad calculator
3.30 Posizione fine / Posición exacta Calculateur du mode 3.42 3
RFC de retour vitesse
sans capteur Drive encoder filter
Drehzahlistwert Filtre du codeur du variateur
im RFC Modus Umrichter-Encoder filter
Calcolatore velocita' di Filtro dell'encoder convertitore
Max. encoder ref. (rpm) feedback in modalita' Filtro de codificador
3.43 de accionamiento
Réf. max.encodeur (tr./min.) RFC sensorless
Italiano
Maximaler Sollwert (min-1) Calculador de

Rif. mass. encoder azionamento (giri/min.) realimentación
Ref. máx. de codificador de accionamiento (rpm) Ref. destination / Destination de de velocidad del modo
réf. / Sollwert-Zielparameter / RFC sin encoder
Destinazione rif. / Destino de ref.
3.46
Scaling
Mise à l'échelle
Sollwertskalierung
Scalatura
Reference Escala ??.??
Sollwert 3.45 3.44
Riferimento
Referencia ??.??

English
Gain select
Sélection du gain Speed loop gains
Auswahl der Gains boucle de vitesse
Drehzahlreglerverstärkung Drehzahlregler:
Selezione guadagno Proportional- und
Seleccionar ganancia Integralverstärkungen
Guadagni anello
3.16 velocità Speed controller output
Ganancias de bucle Sortie contrôleur de vitesse
Speed error de velocidad
Erreur de vitesse Drehzahlregler Ausgang
Drehzahlfehler Uscita controller velocità
3.10 (Kp1) Salida de controlador
Errore velocità
Error de velocidad 0 de velocidad
3.11 (Ki1)
+ 3.03
+ 3.04 Menu 4
_ _ 3.13 (Kp2)
Français Deutsch
1
3.14 (Ki2)
Speed controller
differential gains
Gains de rétroaction
différentielle du
contrôleur de vitesse
Drehzahlregler: Differ-
enzialverstärkungen
Guadagni differenziali 3.12 3.15
retroazione controller 0 (Kd1) 1 (Kd2)
velocità
Ganancias diferenciales
de realimentación de
controlador de
velocidad
At zero speed indicator

Indicateur Vitesse zéro
Zero speed threshold
Speed feedback atteinte
Seuille vitesse zéro
Rétroaction de vitesse Frequenz Null erreicht
Schwelle für Frequenz Null Bipolar ref. select
Drehzahlistwert Indicatore di velocità zero
Soglia velocità zero Bipolarsollwert
Retroazione velocità Indicador de velocidad
Umbral de velocidad cero freigeben
Realimentación de cero
velocidad 3.05 + 1.10
10.03
_
3.02
At or below min. speed indicator
Min Hz 1 Indicateur de fonctionnement à vitesse min.
-1
10.04 ou inférieure
1.07 +5min + Minimalfrequenz erreicht oder unterschritten
0 Indicatore marcia a velocità minima o inferiore
_
Indicador de velocidad mínima o menor
Overspeed trip / Disjonction de survitesse /

+ Fehlerabschaltung Überdrehzahl / Allarme
Max Hz
1.06 +20% 0 _ sovravelocità / Desconexión por sobrevelocidad
(O.SPd)
Overspeed threshold
Seuil de survitesse 1
Below at-speed window indicator
Überdrehzahlgrenze 3.08
Italiano
Indicateur de fenêtre inférieure signal vitesse atteinte
Pre ramp ref. Soglia di velocità eccessiva 3.08 >0 Unterhalb Sollwert
Sollwert vor Umbral de sobrevelocidad Indicatore marcia sotto finestra in velocità
At speed lower limit
Rampe Limite inférieure Indicador de ventana a menos de velocidad máxima
Rif. prerampa Untere Schwelle 3.06 +
Ref. anterior Limite minimo 10.05
a rampa Límite mínimo _
_
1 At speed indicator
1.03 Indicateur de vitesse atteinte
+
0 NOR 10.06 Sollwert erreicht
Indicatore marcia in velocità
Indicador de velocidad máxima
+
3.09 10.07
Absolute at-speed detect mode 3.07
_
Mode Détection vitesse atteinte
n = Nsoll, absolute Grenzen At speed upper limit Above at-speed window indicator
Modo rilevamento in velocità assoluta Limite supérieure Indicateur de fenêtre signal vitesse atteinte
Modo de detección a velocidad signal vitesse atteinte Oberhalb Sollwert
máxima absoluta n = nsoll Indicatore marcia sopra finestra in velocità
(obere Schwelle) Indicador de ventana a más de velocidad máxima
Limite massimo
in velocità
Límite máximo
a toda velocidad

Menu 4: Torque and current control / Couple et contrôle de courant / Drehmoment-

English
und Stromregelung / Controllo della coppia e della corrente / Control de par e
intensidad
OL>
Torque mode sel.
Sél. de Mode Couple
Sel. für Drehmomentmodus
Pre ramp ref. Sel. modo coppia
Sollwert vor Rampe Menu 2: Ramps Motor map
Sel. modo de par
Rif. prerampa Projection moteur
4.11 Motor-parametersatz
Ref. anterior + Mappatura motore Motor Hz
a rampa 1.03
2.01
Plano motor
+
Français Deutsch
2.01 5.01
Post ramp ref.

Réf. post-rampe
10.09 Sollwert nach Rampe
Current limit active Rif. postrampa
Limite de courant activée Ref. posterior a rampa
Stromgrenze aktiv Current loop / Boucle de courant
Limite corrente attivo / Stromregler / Anello di corrente /
Límite de intensidad activo Bucle de corriente
Activ.
4.13 P Gain / Verstärkung /
Wirkstrom
Guadagno /
(A) Magnitude
4.14 I Ganancia
Intensité
Scheinstrom
_ Valore assoluto
4.02 Magnitud
4.01
4.20 (A)
+
Pr 4.02 - Activ.
Motor Motor rated / Wirkstrom
Hz nominal(e) / (A)
-nenn Hz
Torque demand A%
Pr 4.20 - % 4.17 Magnet.
Demande de couple 5.01 5.06 demand(é/a)
Wirkstrom (A)
Torque ref. Drehmomentanforderung Wirkstrom-
Réf.de couple Richiesta coppia Sollwertes Intensidad de par
Drehmomentsollwert Demanda de par Richiesta (A)
Rif. coppia Nm - A
Ref. de par + +
4.08 4.03 Conversion(e) 4.04
Torque ref. Konvertierung _
offset enable +
Motor thermal
Activation time constant
décalage réf. 4.10 Constante de
de couple Torque ref. offset temps thermique
Drehmoment-Offset Décalage réf. couple du moteur
freigeben 4.09 Drehmoment-Offset Thermische Protection mode:
Abilitazione offset Offset rif. coppia Over-riding Motorzeitkonstante Low speed
rif. coppia Desfase de ref. de par limit (A) Costante Vitesse basse
Resultierende Motorschutz-
Italiano
Activación de desfase temporale

de referencia de par Stromgrenze termica motore Motor protection eigenbelüftete
Anulación Constante mode Motoren
Drive rated cont. (A) (A) Limits / Stromgrenzen de límite
Nominal de tiempo Thermische freigeben
de intensidad térmica Motorschutz - Bassa velocità
permanent 4.05 Motor
11.32 del motor Abschaltung Baja velocidad
du variateur (A)
Reglemmenn- 4.06 Regen 4.18
4.15 4.16 4.25
strom
Nominale 5.07
4.07 Symmetrical
in serv. cont.
azionamento (A) Overload detection / Détection de surcharge /
Cont. nominal de
accionamiento (A) Überlasterkennung / Rilevamento sovraccarico /
Detección de sobrecarga
(A)
Motor rated
Nominal(e)
Motornennstrom
10.08 10.09 10.39 4.19 10.17
At 100% Current limit Braking energy Motor Motor current

load active overload overload overload alarm
indicator Limite de indicator accumulator indicator
Indicateur courant activée Indicateur Accumulateur Indicateur
de charge Stromgrenze aktiv de surcharge de surcharge d'alarme
100% Limite corrente d'énergie moteur de surcharge
Nennlaststrom attivo de freinage Motorauslastung courant moteur
erreicht Límite de I x t Akkumulator (Akku) Motorüberlastung
(Anzeige) intensida Bremswiderstand Accumulatore (Anzeige)
Indicatore d activo Indicatore di sovraccarico Indicatore
di carico sovraccarico motore allarme
al 100% energia Acumulador sovracorrente
Indicador frenatura de sobrecarga motore
de carga Indicador de del motor Indicador de
al 100% sobrecarga alarma de
de energía sobrecarga de
de frenado corriente del motor

VT>
English
Inertia compensation torque
Couple de compensation
d’inertie 2.38
Trägheitsvorsteuerung
Coppia di compensazione
inerzia
Par de compensación de
Inertia compensation enable
inercia
Activation de la
compensation d’inertie Motor rated
Trägheitskompensation power factor
Rpm feedback freigeben Facteur de puiss-
Rétroaction rpm 4.22 Abilitazione della ance du moteur
Drehzahlistwert compensazione dell'inerzia Motornenn- Gain select
3.02 leistungsfaktor Sélection
Retroazione rpm Activar compensación de
Final rpm ref. Fattore potenza du gain Current demand filter
Realimentación inercia
Réf. rpm finale nominale Auswahl der Filtre courant demandé
Français Deutsch
Res. Drehzahlsollwert rpm
Motor rated A motore Drehzahlregler- Stromsollwert Filterzeitkonstante
Rif. rpm finale Torque mode sel. Filtro richiesta corrente
Nominal mot. A Factor de verstärkung
Ref. rpm final Sél. de Mode Couple Filtro de demanda de corriente
Motornenn- potencia nominal Selezione
Rpm controller output Sel. für Drehmomentmodus 1 2
strom X del motor guadagno
Sortie contrôleur rpm Sel. modo coppia
3.01 Seleccionar 4.12 4.23
Drehzahlregler Ausgang Sel. modo de par 5.07 5.10
ganancia
Uscita controller
_ Salida de controlador rpm 4.11
3.16
+ Current loop
+ + Boucle de courant
3.04 0
Stromregler
1 + Anello di corrente
Pre-ramp ref 2 4.03 4.04 Bucle de corriente
Réf pré-rampe + _ P Gain
Sollwert vor Rampe
3 4.13
Verstärkung
Riferimento pre-rampa 1.03 4 Torque demand A% Filt.
Demande de couple demand(é/a) 4.14 I Guadagno
Ref anterior a rampa Ganancia
+ Drehmomentan- Wirkstrom-
Zero speed threshold forderung Sollwertes
1 Activ. Magnitude
Seuille vitesse zéro Richiesta coppia Richiesta
Wirkstrom Intensité
Schwelle für Frequenz Null Demanda de par
(A) Scheinstrom
Soglia velocità zero Valore
Umbral de velocidad cero 1 assoluto
2 Speed over-ride level Magnitud
3.05
Niveau d'annulation vitesse (A)
Drehzahlgrenze 4.02 4.01
Torque ref.
Livello variazione velocità
Réf.de couple
Nivel de anulación de velocidad
Drehmomentsollwert
Rif. coppia
+ 2
4.08 Coiler/uncoiler speed over-ride level User current max scaling
Ref. de par
Niveau d'annulation de courant enrouleur/ dérouleur Mise à l'échelle utilisateur du courant max.
Torque ref. offset enable + Aufwickler/Abwickler Drehzahlgrenze Benutzerdefinierte Stromskalierung
Activation décalage réf. 4.17 Magnet.
Livello variazione velocità avvolgitore/svolgitore Scalatura max. corrente da utente (A)
de couple 4.10 Nivel de anulación de velocidad de bobinadora/ Escala máx. corriente
Motor thermal time 4.24
Drehmoment Torque ref. offset desbobinadora de consumo
constant
-Offset freigeben Décalage réf. couple Constante de temps Protection mode:
Abilitazione offset 4.09 Drehmoment-Offset thermique du moteur Low speed
rif. coppia Offset rif. coppia Thermische Vitesse basse
Activación de desfase Desfase de ref. de par Over-riding limit (A) Motorzeitkonstante Motor protection Motorschutz-
de referencia de par
Resultierende Costante temporale mode eigenbelüftete
Drive rated cont. (A) Stromgrenze termica motore Thermische Motoren freigeben
(A) Limits / Stromgrenzen Anulación Constante de tiempo Motorschutz - Bassa velocità
Nominal
permanent de límite térmica del motor Abschaltung Baja velocidad
11.32 4.05 Motor
du variateur (A) de intensidad
4.18 4.15 4.16 4.25
Reglemmenn-
Italiano
4.06 Regen
strom
Nominale 5.07
in serv. cont. 4.07 Symmetrical
azionamento (A)
Overload detection / Détection de surcharge /
Cont. nominal de Überlasterkennung / Rilevamento sovraccarico /
accionamiento (A)
(A)
Motor rated
Nominal(e)
Motornennstrom
10.08 10.09 10.39 4.19 10.17

(Anzeige)
Indicatore
di carico
intensida
d activo
Bremswiderstand Accumulatore
Indicatore
sovraccarico
di sovraccarico
motore
(Anzeige)
Indicatore
allarme
de frenado corriente del moto

SV>
English
Inertia compensation torque

Couple de compensation
d’inertie 2.38
Trägheitsvorsteuerung
Coppia di compensazione
inerzia
Par de compensación de
inercia Inertia compensation enable
Activation de la
compensation d’inertie
Trägheitskompensation
Rpm feedback freigeben
Rétroaction rpm 4.22 Current demand filter
Abilitazione della
Drehzahlistwert Filtre courant demandé
Français Deutsch
3.02 compensazione dell'inerzia

Retroazione rpm Stromsollwert Filterzeitkonstante
Final rpm ref. Activar compensación de
Realimentación Filtro richiesta corrente
Réf. rpm finale inercia
rpm Filtro de demanda de corriente
Res. Drehzahlsollwert 1 2
Rif. rpm finale Torque mode sel. Gain select
Ref. rpm final Sél. de Mode Couple Sélection du gain 4.12 4.23
Rpm controller output Sel. für Drehmomentmodus Auswahl der
Sortie contrôleur rpm Sel. modo coppia Drehzahlregler-
3.01 verstärkung
Drehzahlregler Ausgang Sel. modo de par
Uscita controller Selezione guadagno 3.16
4.11 Seleccionar ganancia
_ Salida de controlador rpm Current loop
+ Boucle de courant
+ + Current Stromregler
3.04 0
demand Anello di corrente
1 + Bucle de corriente
Pre-ramp ref 2 4.03 4.04 4.13 P Gain
Réf pré-rampe + Verstärkung
Sollwert vor Rampe
3 _
Torque demand Filt. 4.14 I Guadagno
Riferimento pre-rampa 1.03 4 Ganancia
Ref anterior a rampa Demande de couple
+ Drehmomentan-
Pr 4.02 -
Zero speed threshold forderung
Seuille vitesse zéro 1 Richiesta coppia
Pr 4.20 -
Schwelle für Frequenz Null Demanda de par User current max scaling
Soglia velocità zero Mise à l'échelle utilisateur
Umbral de velocidad cero du courant max.
1
3.05 2 Benutzerdefinierte
Speed over-ride level
Stromskalierung
Niveau d'annulation vitesse
Torque ref. Scalatura max. corrente da utente
Drehzahlgrenze
Réf.de couple % Escala máx. corriente
Livello variazione velocità
Drehmomentsollwert Wirkstrom de consumo Activ.
Nivel de anulación de velocidad
Rif. coppia + 2 Intensidad 4.20 4.24 4.02 Wirkstrom
4.08 (A)
Ref. de par Coiler/uncoiler speed over-ride level de par
+ Niveau d'annulation de courant (A)
Torque ref. offset enable
Activation décalage réf. enrouleur/ dérouleur
de couple Aufwickler/Abwickler Drehzahlgrenze
4.10 Livello variazione velocità avvolgitore/ Motor thermal time
Drehmoment Torque ref. offset
-Offset freigeben Décalage réf. couple svolgitore constant
Abilitazione offset Drehmoment-Offset Nivel de anulación de velocidad de Constante de temps Protection mode:
4.09 bobinadora/ desbobinadora thermique du moteur
rif. coppia Offset rif. coppia Low speed
Activación de desfase Desfase de ref. de par Thermische Vitesse basse
de referencia de par Over-riding limit (A) Motorzeitkonstante Motor protection Motorschutz-
Resultierende Costante temporale mode eigenbelüftete
termica motore Thermische Motoren freigeben
Italiano
(A) Limits / Stromgrenzen Stromgrenze

Anulación de límite Constante de tiempo Motorschutz - Bassa velocità
Drive rated térmica del motor Abschaltung
11.32 4.05 Motor de intensidad Baja velocidad
continuous
current 4.18 4.15 4.16 4.25
4.06 Regen
Motor rated
5.07
current Symmetrical
4.07
Overload detection / Détection de surcharge /
Überlasterkennung / Rilevamento sovraccarico /
10.08 10.09 10.39 4.19 10.17


(Anzeige) intensida Bremswiderstand Accumulatore (Anzeige)
Indicatore d activo Indicatore di sovraccarico Indicatore
di carico sovraccarico motore allarme
de frenado corriente del motor

Menu 5: Motor control / Contrôle du moteur / Motorsteuerung / Controllo del
English
motore / Control del motor
OL>
Voltage mode
Autotune
Tension mode L1 L2 L3
Mise au point automatique
5.14 Auswahl Spannungsregelung
Autotaratura
Modo tensione
Autoajuste
Modo de tensión
Frequency slaving enable DC / CC Bus V
5.12 Zwischenkreis-
Activation de l'asservissement de fréquence
Frequenzsignal für Slave freigeben spannung
5.13 V/f / U/f / T/f
Abilitazione frequenza per
appl. master/slave Motormap / Carte moteur / V boost 5.05
Slave / Asservissante / Activación de sincro- Motortypenschilddaten / Augmentation
Mappatura motore / 5.15
Richiesta / Secundaria nización de frecuencia Spannungsanhebung
Hz demand Plano del motor Aumento
Français Deutsch
3.13
5.06 Hz (E)Stator. resist.
5.17
Ständerwiderstand Motor V
3.01
5.07 A V: Offset Ständerspannung
5.23 Décalage
Full load rpm Compensación
Tr./min. nominal
Trans. inductance
5.02 V
Post ramp ref. moteur pleine charge 5.24
1 Streuinduktivität
Sollwert nach Rampe Motornenndrehzahl
Rif. Postrampa 5.08 Regime nom. a
Ref. posterior a rampa 0 pieno carico motore
RPM nominal del
+ motor a plena carga 5.01 Hz
2.01 Motor
5.09 V Hz Max. switching kHz
+ Power factor 5.18 commutation
Facteur de Taktfrequenz
puissance 5.04 High stability space vector mod.
0 1 Leistungsfaktor Motor rpm Modulation espace vectorielle à
5.10 Fattore potenza Tr./min. haute stabilité
5.27 nominale Motordrehzahl Hochstabile Vektormodulation
Factor de Velocità 5.19
Enable Modulazione vettoriale dello
potencia nominal spazio ad alta stabilità
Activation
Freigeben No. poles / Modulación de vector espacial
Abilitazione 5.11 poli / polos de alta estabilidad
Activación Polzahl
Quasi square wave enable
Slip comp. Activation quasi-carrée
Motor power 5.20 Quasiblockmodulation freigeben
Comp. de glissement 5.03 Ö3xVxI
Schlupfkompensation / potencia (kW) Abilitazione onda quasi quadra
Comp. di scorrimento Activ. Activar casi cuadrada
Comp. de deslizamiento Wirkstrom Disable auto switching Hz change
(A) 4.02 Désactivation du changement de
4.01 fréquence automatique
% 4.20 Magnitude Aktivierung Temperaturmodell
Wirkstrom Intensité 5.35
Disabilitazione cambiamento
Intensidad de par Scheinstrom frequenza di autocommutazione
(A) Valore assoluto Desactivar cambio de frecuencia
Magnitud de conmutación auto
(A)
4.17 V controller gain
Magnet. 5.31 P-Verstärkung Bremsrampenregler
(A) Guadagno / Ganancia
Italiano

CL>
English
Motor
Hz
5.01
Flux Calc.
Berechnung des
magnetischen Flusses
Calcolatore di flusso
Calculadora de flujo
5.07 A
Français Deutsch
No. poles / poli / polos /

5.11
Polzahl
Speed feedback 5.17 (E)Stator. resist.
Rétroaction de vitesse Ständerwiderstand
Drehzahlistwert 5.24 Trans. inductance
Retroazione velocità Position feedback Streuinduktivität Ref. frame
Realimentación de Rétroaction de position transformation
VT>
velocidad Rückführung Transformation
Positionierungssignal 5.06 Hz de la trame de réf.
Flux angle
3.02
Retroazione posizione
Full load rpm
Tr./min. nominal moteur Angolo flusso
Transformation der
Bezugssysteme
Trasformazione
Realimentación pleine charge Ángulo de flujo
de posición 5.08 Motornenndrehzahl frame di rif.
Regime nom. a pieno carico Transformación
motore de sistema de ref.
RPM nominal del motor a
plena carga
5.09 V
Power factor
Facteur de puissance
5.10 Leistungsfaktor
Fattore potenza nominale
Factor de potencia nominal
Motor (e)stator induct.
5.25 Motorständerinduktivität
Motor saturation break-
point 1 & 2
Point de rupture de
saturation du moteur 1 & 2
5.29 Stützpunkt 1 & 2 für
Speed controller output Motormagneti-
Sortie contrôleur de vitesse 5.30 sierungskennlinie
Punto saturazione 1 & 2
Italiano
Drehzahlregler Ausgang motore

Uscita controller velocità Punto de ruptura de
Salida de controlador saturación motor 1 & 2
SV>
de velocidad Phase angle
Phasenwinkel
3.25 Angolo di fase
3.04
Ángulo de fase
Current refs
Réfs de courant Flux magnitude
Stromsollwerte Intensité du flux
Rif. corrente Valore assoluto flusso
Refs de intensidad Magnitud de flujo
Current control / Contrôle du

courant / Stromregelung /
Controllo corrente /
Control de intensidad
Menu 4
Limits / Stromgrenzen
Autotune / Mise au point automatique Detection: Overload / Surcharge

5.12 Überlasterkennung Current feedback
Autotaratura / Autoajuste
Rilevamento sovraccarico Rétroaction de courant
V boost / Augmentation Detección de sobrecarga Stromistwertrückführung
5.15 Spannungsanhebung / Aumento
Current loop gains Retroazione corrente
High dynamic performance enable Gains boucle de courant Realimentación de corriente
Activation performance dynamique élevée Stromregler Verstärkungen
5.26 Freigabe Entkopplungsnetzwerk Guadagni in anello corrente
Abilitazione elevate prestazioni dinamiche Ganancias de bucle de corriente
Activación de capacidad altamente dinámica Current demand filter
V controller gain Filtre courant demandé
5.31 P-Verstärkung Bremsrampenregler Stromsollwert Filterzeitkonstante
Guadagno / Ganancia Filtro richiesta corrente
Filtro de demanda de corriente
Torque ref. / Réf.de couple
Drehmomentsollwert
Rif. coppia / Ref. de par

English
Français Deutsch
DC / CC Bus V
Zwischenkreis-
spannung
Voltage reference 5.05

Référence de tension
Spannungssollwert
Rif. di tensione
Ref de tension
Modulator
Max. switching kHz
5.18 commutation
Taktfrequenz
Disable auto switching Hz change U
Désactivation du changement de
fréquence automatique V
5.35 Aktivierung Temperaturmodell
Disabilitazione cambiamento W
frequenza di autocommutazione
Desactivar cambio de frecuencia
de conmutación auto
Flux Controller / Regler für magnetischen Fluss /

Controller de flusso / Controlador de flujo
5.09 V
Italiano
Field gain reduction / Réduction du gain
de champ / Reduzierung der Feldverstärkung Motor V
5.21 Riduzione del guadagno di campo / Ständerspannung
Reducción de ganancia de campo
VT> 5.02
5.13 V/f / U/f / T/f Motor power
/ potencia (kW)
Motor full load rated speed optimiser enable
Activation optimisateur de vitesse nominale
5.16 moteur à pleine charge / Nenndrehzahl für (V x 1) 5.03
Autotune auf Rotoradaption / Autotaratura
velocità nominale / Autoajuste nominal de rpm
SV>
High speed servo mode enable
Activation d'affaiblissement du champ
5.22 Feldschwächung freigeben Activ.
Abilitazione modo servoazionamento ad alta velocità
Activación del modo servo a alta velocidad Wirkstrom
(A)
4.02 4.01
Magnitude
Intensité
Scheinstrom
Valore assoluto
Magnitud
4.17 (A)
Magnet.
(A)

Menu 6: Sequencer and clock / Séquenceur et horloge / Ansteuerlogik und

English
Betriebsstundenzähler / Sequenziatore e clock / Secuenciador y reloj
Control word enable
Activation mot de contrôle
Stop / Start Steuerwort freigeben 6.43
Arrêt / Démarrage Abilitazione parola di controllo
Ansteuerlogik Activar palabra de control
Avviamento / Arresto Control word Sequencer
Parada / Inicio Ansteuerlogik
6.42
6.04 Stop mode selector
Drive enable Sélecteur Mode Arrêt
6.15 6.01 Selektor für Stop-Modus
Modo di arresto
Run forward Modo de parada
T25 digital I/O 2 6.30
Mains loss mode
Mode Pertes principales
Français Deutsch
Jog forward
6.31 6.03 Reaktion bei Netzausfall
25 Modo perdita rete
Run reverse Modo de pérdida principal
T26 digital I/O 3 6.32 Hold zero speed enable
Forward / Reverse Activation Maintien
vitesse zéro
26 Menu 8 6.33 Ref. activated
Aktivieren Halten
6.08 1.11 Sollwert freigegeben
Run (Freigabe)
T27 digital input 4 Mantenimento velocità Abilitazione riferimento
6.34 zero
Jog reverse Mantener velocidad cero
27 6.37 Catch a spinning motor Reverse
Détection moteur tournant Marche Arrière
Not stop 1.12 Linkslauf
6.09 Fangfunktion
6.39 Ripresa al volo motore Inversione
Detección de motor en Marcha atrás
Hardware enable giro
Activation circuit 6.29
Hardware Freigabe (Anzeige) Enable sequencer latching
Activation enclenchement Jog / Pas-a-pas /
Abilitazione hardware Limit switch 1.13
du séquenceur Tippen / Velocidad
Activar hardware Commutateur de limite 6.35
Ansteuerlogik mit
Endschalter Rechtslauf
Flankentriggerung
Fine corsa 6.40
6.36 freigeben
Disyuntor de seguridad
Abilitazione autotenuta
1&2
del sequenziatore Inverter enable
Logic Activar enclavamiento de
1 Activation inverseur
secuenciador Umrichter freigeben
OL> Abilitazione inverter
RESET Injection braking level
Activacion de mutador
Niveau du freinage à
injection
Ref. selected Stromstärke für
Réf. sélectionnée 6.06 Gleichstrombremsung VT>
Gewählte Sollwertquelle Livello di frenatura Menu 2
Selezione rif. Logic 1 mediante iniezione
Ramps
Ref. seleccionada Nivel de frenado por
inyección Menu 3
Italiano
0 1 Hard speed ref

1.49 Pr 1.49 = 4 Injection braking time Réf haute vitesse
Durée du freinage à Zusatzsollwert
injection freigeben
STOP key enable / Activation Dauer Gleichstrombremsung Rif. velocità reale
6.07
touche ARRÊT / STOP-Taste Tempo di frenatura mediante Ref. de velocidad fija
6.12 iniezione
freigeben / Abilitazione tasto di
ARRESTO / Activar tecla STOP Tiempo de frenado por
inyección
FWD/REV key enable / Activation
touche AVT/ARR / 6.13 Control: clock / horloge / reloj
Rechts-/Linkslauftaste freigeben Zeitmodul
Abilitazione tasto marcia AV/IND Power meter
Electricity cost (pr KWh)
Activar tecla FWD/REV Coût en électricité
Compteur d'énergie
Power-up time 6.24 Stromzähler
6.16 Energiekosten 6.25
Temps de mise sous tension Costo dell'elettricità Contatore di energia
Laufzeit Umrichter an Netzspannung 6.20
6.21 Coste de electricidad Contador de potencia:
Tempo collegamento alim.
Tiempo de encendido Reset energy meter
Réinitialisation compteur de
consommation d'énergie Running cost
Run-time 6.17 Coût d'exploitation
Energiezähler (Zurücksetzen)
Temps de service Reset contatore di energia 6.26 Betriebskosten
6.22
Betriebsstundenzähler Reiniciar contador de potencia Costo di esercizio
6.23
Tempo di funzionamento Coste de utilización
Time betw filter changes
Tiempo de ejecución Intervalle entre les
changements de filtre Time before filter
6.18
Zeit zwischen zwei Filterwechseln change due
Motor power Tempo fra i cambiamenti dei filtri
5.03 Temps avant le
/ potencia (kW) Tiempo entre cambios de filtro changement de filtre
Filter change required/done 6.27 Zeit bis zum nächsten
Changement de filtre Filterwechsel
Pr 6.28 nécessaire/effectué
Select clock for trip log time stamp Intervallo di cambio filtro
Filterwechsel erforderlich /
Sélection horloge pour enregistrement instant de disjonction 6.19 Tiempo hasta cambio
wurde ausgeführt
Auswahl für Fehlerzeitstempel Cambiamento filtro richiesto / de filtro conveniente
Selezione dell'orologio per campionamento del tempo nel registro allarmi effettuato
Seleccionar reloj para exploración de tiempo de registro de desconexión Cambio de filtro necesario/
efectuado
DC / CC Bus V 6.28
Zwischenkreisspannung 5.05
Drive power supply monitor Active supply

Surveillance d'alimentation du variateur Alimentation activée
Monitor des Umrichternetzteils 6.44 48V DC-Versorgung aktiv
48V Monitoraggio alimentazione azionamento Alimentazione attiva
Control de alimentación del accionmiento Alimentación activa

Menu 7: Analog I/O / E/S analogique / Analoge Ein- und Ausgänge / I/O analogici /
English
E/S analógica
Input
Entrée
Offset trim Eingang
Correction décalage Ingresso Destination
Offsetkorrektur Offset Zielparameter
Entrada Décalage
Compens. offset Destinazione
Compens. de desfase Desfase Destino
7.01
Analog 1 Input / Entrée 7.07 7.30 7.10
Eingang / Ingresso
Entrada Analog ref. 1
Analogsollwert 1
+ + ??.??
5 Analog rif. 1
V/f U/f + + 7.08
6 T/f 1.36
Français Deutsch
Scaling
7.26 Mise à l'échelle x(-1) ??.??
V/f sample time
Intervalle d'échantillonnage U/f Skalierung
Filterzeit / Tempo campionamento Current loop loss Scalatura 7.09 Invert
V/f / Tiempo de exploración de T/f Perte courant de boucle Escala Inversion(e)
Input
Stromschleifenfehler
7.25 Entrée
Perdita anello corrente
Eingang
Calibrate full scale / Calibrage pleine Pérdida de Destination
Ingresso
échelle Endwertabgleich / Taratura bucle de corriente Zielparameter
fondo scala / Calibrar escala completa
Entrada Offset Destinazione
Décalage Destino
7.28 Desfase
7.02
7.14
Analog 2 Input / Entrée 7.31
Eingang / Ingresso Analog ref. 2
Entrada Analogsollwert 2
+ ??.??
+ Analog rif. 2
7 A/D 7.11 7.12
1.37
Mode / Modus / Modo Scaling
Current loop loss Mise à l'échelle x(-1) ??.??
Perte courant de boucle Skalierung
Input Scalatura Invert
Stromschleifenfehler Entrée 7.13
Perdita anello corrente Escala Inversion(e)
Eingang
Pérdida de Ingresso Destination
bucle de corriente Entrada Zielparameter
Offset
Destinazione
Décalage
7.29 Destino
7.03 Desfase
7.18
Analog 3 Input / Entrée 7.31
7.32
Eingang / Ingresso
Entrada
+ ??.??
7.15 + 7.16
8 A/D
Mode / Modus / Modo Scaling
Italiano
Mise à l'échelle x(-1) ??.??
Skalierung
Control / Réglage Source / Quell Invert
Scalatura 7.17
Umschaltung Sorgente / Origen Inversion(e)
Escala
7.33 7.19
Analog 1 Output /
Sortie / Ausgang /
Motor Hz
??.?? Uscita / Salida
OL> 5.01
7.20 7.21 9
CL> 3.02
??.?? Scaling Mode / Modus
Rpm feedback Mise à l'échelle Modo
Rétroaction rpm Skalierung
Drehzahlistwert Scalatura / Escala
Retroazione rpm Español International
Realimentación
rpm Source / Quell
Sorgente / Origen
7.22
Analog 2 Output /
Activ.
Sortie / Ausgang /
Wirkstrom
??.?? Uscita / Salida
(A)
4.02 7.23 7.24 10
??.?? Scaling Mode / Modus
Mise à l'échelle Modo
Skalierung
Scalatura / Escala

Menu 8: Digital I/O / E/S logique / Digitale Ein- und Ausgänge / I/O digitali / E/S digital
English
At zero speed indicator

Indicateur Vitesse zéro
Output select atteinte
State / état Sélection sortie Frequenz Null erreicht
Status / Stato Auswahl als Ausgang Indicatore di velocità zero
Estado Selezione uscita Indicador de velocidad
??.??
Selec. salida cero
8.01 8.31 10.03
x(-1) ??.??
Digital(i) I/O / E/S / E/A 1

E/S numérique 1 Source/Destination
8.21
Quell/Zielparameter
Français Deutsch
Sorgente/Destinazione
24 8.29 8.30 Origen/Destino
I/O / E/S Open collector output 8.11 Invert
polarity Sortie collecteur ouvert Inversion(e)
Positive Logik Ausgang
Uscita collettore aperto
Salida de colector abierto ??.??
x(-1) ??.??
Output select
State / état Sélection sortie
Status / Stato Auswahl als Ausgang
Estado Selezione uscita ??.??
Selec. salida
8.02 8.32
x(-1) ??.??
Digital(i) I/O / E/S / E/A 2 Source/Destination

E/S numérique 2 6.04 8.22 Quell/Zielparameter
Stop / Start Sorgente/Destinazione
25 8.29 8.30 Arrêt / Démarrage Origen/Destino
8.12 Ansteuerlogik
I/O / E/S Open collector output Avviamento / Arresto Drive reset
polarity Sortie collecteur ouvert Parada / Inicio Réinitialisation
Positive Logik Ausgang du variateur
Uscita collettore aperto Invert
Inversion(e) Umrichter
Salida de colector abierto ??.?? Reset
Italiano
10.33
x(-1) ??.?? Reset
azionamento
Reinicio de
accionamiento
Output select
State / état Sélection sortie
Status / Stato Auswahl als Ausgang
Estado Selezione uscita ??.??
Selec. salida
8.03 8.33
x(-1) ??.??
Digital(i) I/O / E/S / E/A 2 Source/Destination

E/S numérique 2 Quell/Zielparameter
6.04 8.23
Sorgente/Destinazione
8.29 8.30 Stop / Start Origen/Destino
26
Arrêt / Démarrage
I/O / E/S Open collector output 8.13 Ansteuerlogik
polarity Sortie collecteur ouvert Avviamento / Arresto
Parada / Inicio
Run forward
Positive Logik Ausgang Marche Avant
Uscita collettore aperto Invert
Inversion(e) Ansteuerbit 0:
Salida de colector abierto ??.?? Rechtslauf
6.30
x(-1) ??.?? Marcia avanti
Marcha adelante

English
Invert Destination
Inversion(e) Zielparameter
State / état
Status / Stato 8.04 8.14 6.04 8.24
Digital(e) input 4 / Entrée Estado Stop / Start
numérique / Eingang / Run reverse
Arrêt / Démarrage
Ingresso / Entrada Marche Arrière
Ansteuerlogik
Avviamento / Arresto Ansteuerbit 2:
??.?? Start Linkslauf
Parada / Inicio
27 8.29
6.32
I/O / E/S polarity
Positive Logik x(-1) ??.?? Marcia inversa
Marcha atrás
Ref. selector Auto-selection disable
Sélecteur réf. Désactivation sélection automatique
Français Deutsch
Auswahl Sollwertquelle 8.39
Automatische Digitaleingangsauswahl
Selettore rif. Disabilitazione autoselezione
Selector de ref. Desact. selección auto
1.14
Invert Destination
Digital(e) input 5 / Entrée State / état
Status / Stato 8.05 8.15 8.25
numérique / Eingang /
Ingresso / Entrada Estado
??.?? Analog 2 select
28 8.29
1.41
I/O / E/S polarity
x(-1) ??.??
Positive Logik
Invert Destination
State / état
Status / Stato 8.06 8.16 8.26
Digital(e) input 5 / Entrée Estado
numérique / Eingang / Jog forward
Ingresso / Entrada Vitesse pas-à-pas
Ansteuerbit 1: Tippen
??.?? velocidad lenta
29 8.29
6.31
I/O / E/S polarity
x(-1) ??.??
Positive Logik
Source / Quell State / état

Invert Status / Stato
Sorgente / Origen
Inversion(e) Estado
Italiano
8.28
8.18 8.08
24V output / Sortie
Ausgang / Uscita
??.?? Salida
0.00
22
??.?? x(-1)
Indicator Mode / Modus

Status Modo
8.09 8.10 External trip
Drive enable
Activation variateur Disjonction
Reglerfreigabe Fehlerabschaltung Español International
Abilitazione azionamento Allarme
Activar accionamiento Desconexión
x(-1) 10.32
31
Drive enable / Activation variateur
Reglerfreigabe / Abilitazione
Source / Quell azionamento / Activar accionamiento
Invert
Drive Healthy Sorgente / Origen Inversion(e)
Variateur en ordre
8.27 8.17
Umrichter
Betriebsbereit
Stato convertitore State / état
Accionamiento en Status / Stato
??.?? Estado
perfecto estado
10.01
8.07 41
??.?? x(-1)
42
0V

Menu 9: Programmable logic, motorised pot and binary sum / Logique

English
programmable, potentiomètre motorisé et somme binaire / Programmierbare
Logik, Motorpoti und Binärcodierer / Logica, motopotenziometro e funzione
sommatoria binaria programmabili / Lógica programable, potenciómetro
motorizado y suma binaria
Function-1 input-1
Fonction-1 Entrée-1
Funktion 1, Eigang 1 Invert F-1 Output
ingresso 1 funzione 1 Inversion(e) Sortie / Ausgang
Français Deutsch
Entrada 1 de función 1 9.05 Uscita / Salida

F-1 Output
??.?? Sortie / Ausgang Indicator
Uscita / Salida Ausgabe
Invert F-1 Destination
Inversion(e) 9.01 9.10 Zielparameter
??.?? x(-1) Destinazione
9.08 Destino
Source / Quell
Function-1 input-2 9.04 Sorgente / Origen ??.??
Invert
Funktion 1, Eigang 2
Inversion(e) 9.09
ingresso 1 funzione 2
Entrada 1 de función 2 9.07 x(-1) F-1 ??.??
Delay / Retard
??.?? Verzögerung
Ritardo / Retardo
??.?? x(-1)
Source / Quell
9.06
Sorgente / Origen
Function-2 input-1
Funktion 2, Eigang 1 Invert
ingresso 2 funzione 1 Inversion(e)
Entrada 2 de función 1 9.15
F-2 Output
??.?? Sortie / Ausgang
Italiano
F-2 Output Uscita / Salida

Sortie / Ausgang F-2 Destination
Uscita / Salida 9.02 9.20 Zielparameter
??.?? x(-1) Destinazione
9.18 Destino
Source / Quell
Function-2 input-2 9.14 Sorgente / Origen ??.??
Invert
Funktion 2, Eigang 2
Inversion(e) 9.19
ingresso 2 funzione 2
Entrada 2 de función 2 9.17 x(-1) F-2 ??.??
Delay / Retard
??.??
Verzögerung
Ritardo / Retardo
??.?? x(-1)
Source / Quell
9.16
Sorgente / Origen

English
Motor pot
Motor pot Motor pot Output
Rate / Valeur nominale Bipolar select Motor pot
Sortie / Ausgang
Änderungsrate Bipolarauswahl Destination
Uscita / Salida
Tempo / Variación Zielparameter
Français Deutsch
9.22
Motor pot 9.23 9.03 9.25
Up / Haut
Auf / Aumento
Conectado
9.26
??.??
M 9.24
Motor pot ??.??
Output scale
9.27 étage de sortie
Ausgangsskalierung
Motor pot Scala uscita
Down / Bas Escala de salida
Ab / Diminuzione
Desconectado
Motor pot
9.28 9.21 Mode / Modus
Motor pot Modo
Reset to zero / Remise à zéro
Zurücksetzen auf Null
Azzeramento / Puesta a cero
Binary-sum Logic output value

Somme binaire Valeur de sortie logique
Binärcodierer
Italiano
Summen Code
Somma binaria Offset Valore uscita logica
Suma binaria Décalage Valor lógico resultante Destination
Desviación Zielparameter
9.34 9.32 9.33
9.29
Logic ones (LSB)
Bits d'ordre 1
Einsen Bit 0
Bit 1 logica
Dos lógicos + ??.??
9.30 S +
Logic twos ??.??

Bits d'ordre 2
Zweien Bit 2
Bit 1 logica
Unos lógicos
9.31
Logic fours (MSB)
Bits d'ordre 4
Vieren Bit 2
Bit 4 logica
Cuatros lógicos

Menu 10: Status and trips / États et mises en sécurité / Statusmeldungen und
English
Fehlerabschaltungen / Stato e allarmi
Parameter
Umrichter Accionamiento en
10.01 Drive healthy Variateur en ordre Stato dell'azionamento
Betriebsbereit perfecto estado
10.02 Drive active Variateur actif Motor bestromt Azionamento attivo Accionamiento activo
10.03 Zero speed Vitesse zéro Drehzahl = 0 Velocità zero Velocidad cero
Fonctionnement à Marcia alla velocità Funcionamiento a
Running at or below
10.04 vitesse minimum ou auf Minimaldrehzahl minima o a una velocidad mínima o
minimum speed
inférieure inferiore menor
Français Deutsch
En dessous de la Sotto la velocità Por debajo de

10.05 Below set speed unterhalb Sollwert
vitesse réglée impostata velocidad fijada
10.06 At speed Vitesse atteinte Drehzahl erreicht In velocità A toda velocidad
Au-dessus de la Sopra la velocità Por encima de
10.07 Above set speed oberhalb Sollwert
vitesse réglée impostata velocidad fijada
10.08 Load reached Charge atteinte Nennlaststrom erreicht Carico raggiunto Carga alcanzada
L'uscita Salida de
Drive output is at La sortie du variateur
10.09 Stromgrenze aktiv dell'azionamento è al accionamiento en
current limit est en limite de courant
limite di corrente límite de intensidad
Generatorischer
10.10 Regenerating Régénération Rigenerazione Regeneración
Betrieb
Inverseur IGBT de IGBT di frenatura
10.11 Braking IGBT active Bremschopper IGBT de frenado activa
freinage activé attivo
Alarme de la Alarm Allarme resistore di Alarma de resistencia
10.12 Braking resistor alarm
résistance de freinage Bremswiderstand frenatura de frenado
10.13 Direction commanded Direction commandée Soll-Drehrichtung Direzione comandata Dirección controlada
Dirección de
10.14 Direction running Sens de marche Ist-Drehrichtung Direzione eseguita
funcionamiento
Perte d'alimentation
10.15 Mains loss Netzausfall Perdita della rete Pérdida principal
secteur
Unterspannung im ZK
10.16 Under voltage active Sous-tension activée Sottotensione attiva Subtensión activa
erkannt
Alarm: Allarme di
10.17 Overload alarm Alarme de surcharge Alarma de sobrecarga
Italiano
Motorüberlastung sovraccarico
Alarm: Allarme di Alarma de exceso de
Drive over temperature Alarme de température
10.18 Umrichterübertempera sovratemperatura temperatura de
alarm élevée sur le variateur
tur azionamento accionamiento
Avertissement sur Avvertenza Advertencia de
10.19 Drive warning Umrichterwarnung
variateur dell'azionamento accionamiento
10.20 Trip 0 Disjonction 0 Letzter Fehler Allarme 0 Desconexión 0
10.21 Trip 1 Disjonction 1 Fehler vor Obigem Allarme 1 Desconexión 1

Full power braking Durée de freinage à Einschaltdauer Tempo di frenatura a Tiempo total de
10.30
time pleine puissance Bremswiderstand piena potenza frenado mecánico
Full power braking Durée de freinage à Periodendauer Periodo di frenatura a Intervalo total de
10.31
period pleine puissance Bremswiderstand piena potenza frenado mecánico
Externe
10.32 External trip Disjonction externe Allarme esterno Desconexión externa
Fehlerauslösung “Et”
Réinitialisation du Umrichter Reiniciar
10.33 Drive reset Reset azionamento
variateur zurücksetzen accionamiento
Nombre de tentatives
No. of auto-reset Auto-Reset: Anzahl N. di tentativi di Nº de intentos de
10.34 de réinitialisation
attempts der Versuche autoreset reinicio auto
automatique
Temporisation
Auto-Reset: Retardo de reinicio
10.35 Auto-reset delay réinitialisation Ritardo di autoreset
Verzögerung auto
automatique

Parameter
English
Maintien du
Mantener
variateur« en ordre » Stato dell'azionamento
Hold drive healthy until Betriebsbereit bei accionamiento en
10.36 jusqu'à la dernière mantenuto fino
last attempt Auto-Reset perfecto estado hasta
tentative de all'ultimo tentativo
último intento
réinitialisation
Action sur la détection Stop bei unkritischen Azione al rilevamento Acción al detectar la
10.37 Action on trip detection
d'une disjonction Fehlern dell'allarme desconexión
Anwender Desconexión de
10.38 User trip Disjonctions utilisateur Allarme da utente
Fehlerauslösung usuario
Accumulateur de Accumulatore di Acumulador de
Braking energy I x t - Akkumulator
10.39 surcharge d'énergie de sovraccarico energia di sobrecarga de energía
overload accumulator Bremswiderstand
Français Deutsch
freinage frenatura de frenado
10.40 Status word Mot d'état Umrichter - Statuswort Parola di stato Palabra de estado
Tiempo de
Temps de disjonction Letzter Fehler: Zeit - Tempo allarme 0:
10.41 Trip 0 time: years.days desconexión 0:
0: années/jours Jahre.Tage anni.giorni
años.días
Tiempo de
Trip 0 time: Temps de disjonction Letzter Fehler: Zeit - Tempo allarme 0:
10.42 desconexión 0:
hours.minutes 0: heures/minutes Stunden.Minuten ore.minuti
horas.minutos
Fehler vor Obigem: Tiempo de
10.43 Trip 1 time Temps de disjonction 1 Tempo allarme 1
Zeit desconexión 1
Zeit desconexión 2
Zeit desconexión 3
Zeit desconexión 4
Zeit desconexión 5
Zeit desconexión 6
Zeit desconexión 7
Zeit desconexión 8
Italiano
Zeit desconexión 9

Menu 11: General drive set-up / Configuration générale du variateur / Allgemeine

English
Umrichterkonfiguration / Impostazione generale del convertitore / Configuración
general del accionamiento
Parameter
11.01 Pr 0.11 set up Configuration du Pr 0.11 Konfiguration für Pr 0.11 Impostazione Pr 0.11 Configuración de Pr 0.11
Français Deutsch
Mise à l'échelle du
11.21 Parameter scaling Skalierung für Pr 0.30 Scalatura parametro Escala de parámetro
paramètre
Parametro visualizzato
Parameter displayed Paramètre affiché à la Parameter bei Netz Parámetro mostrado
11.22 al collegamento
at power-up mise sous tension Ein anzeigen al encender
all'alimentazione
Italiano
11.23 Serial address Adresse série Serielle Adresse Indirizzo seriale Dirección serie {0.37}
Modus serielle
11.24 Serial mode Mode Série Modo seriale Modo serie {0.35}
Schnittstelle
Velocità di trasm. in
11.25 Baud rate Débit en bauds Baudrate Velocidad en baudios {0.36}
baud
Retard minimum de Ritardo minimo Retardo mínimo de
Minimum comms Umschaltzeit für
11.26 transmission de trasmissione transmisión de
transmit delay Zweidrahtbetrieb
communication comunicazioni comunicaciones
Derivat Code für
Derivata del Derivativo del
11.28 Drive derivative Dérivé du variateur Funktionsunterschied
convertitore accionamiento
zum Standardgerät
11.29 Software version Version du logiciel Softwareversion Versione software

Versión de software {0.50}
Code de sécurité Codice di sicurezza
Código de seguridad
11.30 User security code Sicherheitscode {0.34}
utilisateur utente de usuario
Modo de
Modo azionamento da
11.31 User drive mode Mode Utilisateur Umrichter Betriebsart accionamiento de {0.48}
utente
usuario
Maximal zulässiger
Courant nominal Corrente nominale Intensidad nominal
Maximum Heavy Duty Nennstrom im Betrieb
11.32 maximum Cycle massima in Servizio máxima con gran {0.32}
current rating mit erhöhter Überlast
difficile gravoso amperaje
(150%)
Tension nominale du Umrichternennspannu Tensione nominale Tensión nominal de
11.33 Drive voltage rating {0.31}
variateur ng dell'azionamento accionamiento
Sous-version du Software: Sotto-versione del Subversión de
11.34 Software sub-version
logiciel Unterversion software software
Anzahl der parallelen
11.35 Number of modules Nombre de modules Numero di moduli Número de módulos
Leistungsmodule
Données des
SMARTCARD- Dati dei parametri nella
SMARTCARD paramètres Datos de parámetros
Parameterdaten, die SMARTCARD
11.36 parameter data SMARTCARD de SMARTCARD {0.29}
bereits geladen precedentemente
previously loaded chargées previamente cargados
wurden caricati
préalablement

Parameter
English
Número de bloque de
SMARTCARD data Numéro de données SMARTCARD- Numero dati nella
11.37 datos de
number de la SMARTCARD Datenblocknummer SMARTCARD
SMARTCARD
SMARTCARD data Type/mode données SMARTCARD: Modo / tipo di dati Modo/tipo de datos de
11.38
type / mode de la SMARTCARD Datentyp/Modus nella SMARTCARD SMARTCARD
Version des Versión del bloque de
SMARTCARD data Version des données Versione dati nella
11.39 SMARTCARD- datos de
version de la SMARTCARD SMARTCARD
Datenblocks SMARTCARD
Suma de
Somme de contrôle Carattere di controllo
SMARTCARD data Prüfsumme für comprobación de
11.40 des données de la dati nella
checksum SMARTCARD-Daten datos de
SMARTCARD SMARTCARD
Français Deutsch
SMARTCARD
Zeit für die Rückkehr
Délai d'attente du Timeout del modo di Tiempo límite de modo
11.41 Status mode timeout in den Anzeigemodus
mode État stato de estado
- Display
Clonage de Parameterhandling - Duplicación de
11.42 Parameter cloning Clonazione parametro {0.30}
paramètres SMARTCARD parámetro
Valeurs par défaut de Valori predefiniti di
11.43 Load defaults Defaultwerte Laden Cargas por defecto
la charge carico
Status
11.44 Security status État de sécurité Stato della sicurezza Estado de seguridad {0.49}
Sicherheitscode
Sélection des
Select motor 2 Auswahl Selezione dei Seleccionar
11.45 paramètres du moteur
parameters Motorparametersatz 2 parametri motore 2 parámetros de motor 2
2
Valeurs par défaut Valori di default
Defaults previously Vorher geladene Valores por defecto
11.46 chargées precedentemente
loaded Defaultwerte cargados previamente
préalablement caricati
Activation du
Abilitazione Activación de
programme de
Drive Onboard PLC Internes SPS- programma PLC programa PLC
11.47 l'automate
program enable Programm starten Onboard del integrado del
programmable
embarqué du variateur
Etat du programme de
Stato del programma Estado de programa
Drive Onboard PLC l'automate Internes SPS-
11.48 PLC Onboard del PLC integrado del
program status programmable Programm: Status
Italiano
Evènements de
Eventi di
programmation de Internes SPS- Programaciones de
Drive Onboard PLC programmazione PLC
11.49 l'automate Programm : Anzahl PLC integrado del
programming events Onboard del
programmable der Downloads accionamiento
convertitore
Temps d'analyse
maximum du Tempo massimo di Tiempo máximo de
Drive Onboard PLC Internes SPS-
programme de scansione programma barrido de programa
11.50 program average Programm: Maximale
l'automate PLC Onboard del PLC integrado del
scan time Durchlaufzeit
programmable convertitore accionamiento
embarqué du variateur Español International
Première exécution du
Primera ejecución del
programme de Internes SPS- Prima esecuzione
Drive Onboard PLC programa PLC
11.51 l'automate Programm : programma PLC
program first run integrado del
programmable Initialisierung Onboard del
accionamiento
embarqué du variateur convertitore

Menu 12: Threshold detectors, variable selectors and brake control function /
English
Détecteurs de seuil, sélecteurs de variable et fonction de contrôle de freinage /
Schwellenwertschalter, Variablenselektor und Bremsfunktionen / Rilevatori di soglia
e selettori dei valori variabili / Detectores de umbral y selectores de variables
Threshold Dector 1 / Détecteur de seuil 1 / Schwellwertschalter 1
Rilevatore soglia 1 / Detector de umbral 1
Output / Sortie
Uscita / Salida
Threshold level
Ausgangssignal
Niveau du seuil Destination
Ansprechpegel Zielparameter
Français Deutsch
Livello soglia 12.04 12.01

Nivel de umbral 12.07
??.?? ??.??
??.?? x(-1) ??.??
12.03 12.05 12.06

Input source Hysteresis Invert
source d'entrée Isteresi Inversion(e)
Eingangsquelle
Sorgente ingresso
Origen de entrada
Threshold Dector 2 / Détecteur de seuil 2 / Schwellwertschalter 2

Rilevatore soglia 2 / Detector de umbral 2
Output / Sortie
Uscita / Salida
Threshold level
Ausgangssignal
Niveau du seuil Destination
Italiano
Ansprechpegel Zielparameter
Livello soglia 12.24 12.02
Nivel de umbral 12.27
??.?? ??.??
??.?? x(-1) ??.??
12.23 12.25 12.26

Input source Hysteresis Invert

source d'entrée Isteresi Inversion(e)
Eingangsquelle
Sorgente ingresso
Origen de entrada
Threshold level
Niveau du seuil Hysteresis
Ansprechpegel Isteresi
Livello soglia
Nivel de umbral t
Output / Sortie
Uscita / Salida
Ausgangssignal
t

English
Variable Selector 1 / Sélecteur de variable 1 / Variablenselektor 1
Selettore 1 valori variabili / Selector de v 1 ariable
Input 1 scaling
entrée 1 mise à l'échelle
Skalierung Eingang 1 Output / Sortie
Scalatura ingresso 1 Uscita / Salida
??.?? Ausgangssignal Destination
Escala 1 de entrada
Zielparameter
12.13
12.12 12.11
??.??
Input 1 source
entrée 1 source Mode / Modus ??.??
Français Deutsch
12.10
12.08 Quell Eingang 1 Modo
Sorgente ingresso 1
Origen 1 de entrada 12.15 Control / Steuerung
??.??
??.??
12.14
??.?? Input 2 scaling
Skalierung Eingang 2
12.09 Scalatura ingresso 2
Escala 2 de entrada
Input 2 source
entrée 2 source
Quell Eingang 2
Sorgente ingresso 2
Origen 2 de entrada
Variable Selector 2 / Sélecteur de variable 2 / Variablenselektor 2

Selettore 2 valori variabili / Selector de v 2 ariable
Input 1 scaling
Skalierung Eingang 1 Output / Sortie
Scalatura ingresso 1 Uscita / Salida
??.?? Ausgangssignal Destination
Escala 1 de entrada
Italiano
Zielparameter
12.33
12.32 12.31
??.??
Input 1 source
entrée 1 source Mode / Modus ??.??
12.30
12.28 Quell Eingang 1 Modo
Sorgente ingresso 1
Origen 1 de entrada 12.35 Control / Steuerung
??.??
??.??
12.34
??.?? Input 2 scaling
Skalierung Eingang 2
12.29 Scalatura ingresso 2
Escala 2 de entrada
Input 2 source
entrée 2 source
Quell Eingang 2
Sorgente ingresso 2
Origen 2 de entrada

OL> Brake function / Fonction de freinage / Bremsfunktion / Funzione frenatura /

English
Función de frenado
Magnitude / Intensité
Scheinstrom / Valore assoluto
Magnitud (A)
Drive active
Variateur actif
4.01
Motor bestromt
+ Convertitore attivo
Upper current threshold _ Accionamiento activo
Seuil supérieur actuel
Oberer Stromschwellenwert 10.02
Soglia alta corrente
Umbral de intensidad máximo
Post-brake release delay
12.42 Retard de relâchement des post-freins
Verzögerung nach der Bremsfreigabe
Ritardo rilascio post-frenatura
12.43 Intervalo anterior a desactivación del freno Ramp hold
Français Deutsch
Lower current threshold Maintien de la rampe

12.47 Rampe stop
Seuil inférieur actuel
Unterer Stromschwellenwert Mantenimento rampa
Soglia bassa corrente Retención de rampa
Umbral de intensidad mínimo
2.03
Motor Hz
5.01 + 12.40
_ Brake controller
LAT Contrôleur de freins Brake release
Brake release Hz 12.41
Bremsregler 12.46 Relâchement des freins
Desserrage des freins
Controller freno Bremsfreigabe
Bremsfreigabe / Rilascio freno Pre-brake release delay Rilascio freno
Desactivación del freno Controlador de freno
Retard de relâchement Desactivación del freno
12.44 T25 Digital(i) I/O / E/S / E/A 2 des post-freins
E/S numérique 2 Verzögerung vor der Bremsfreigabe
Brake apply Hz Ritardo rilascio pre-frenatura
8.12 Invert / Inversion(e)
Enclenchement des freins Intervalo anterior a desactivación
Bremsenaktivierungs Source/Destination / Quell/ del freno
Inserimento freno 8.22 Zielparameter / Sorgente/
Activación del freno Destinazione / Origen/Destino
12.45 + Output select / Sélection sortie
_ 8.32 Auswahl als Ausgang
Ref on / à Selezione uscita / Selec. salida
Sollwert ein
Rif. attivato
Ref activada
8.17 Invert / Inversion(e)
1.11 Source / Quell / Sorgente /
8.27 Origen
input output Entrée Sortie Eingang Ausgang ingresso uscita entrada salida
LAT Réinitial- LAT Zurück- LAT reset- LAT LAT

reset isation setzen taggio reinicio
Si l'entrée de réinitialisation est à 1, Bei einem Zurücksetz-Eingangssignal Si la entrada de reinicio es 1,

la sortie sera à 0. von 1 beträgt das Ausgangssignal 0.
If the reset input is 1, the output is 0. Se l'ingresso di reset è 1, l'uscita è 0. la salida tiene el valor 0.
Si l'entrée de réinitialisation est à 0, Bei einem Zurücksetz-Eingangssignal
If the reset input is 0, the output la sortie Se l'ingresso di reset è 0, the output Cuando la entrada de reinicio es 0,
von 0 wird das Ausgangssignal auf 1 la salida se fija en 1 si la entrada es 1.
latches at 1 if the input is 1. s'enclenchera sur 1 si l'entrée est à 1. gehalten, wenn das Eingangssignal 1
latches at 1 if the input is 1.
Italiano
beträgt.
OL> Brake sequence / Séquence de freinage / Bremssequenz / Sequenza di

frenatura / Secuencia de frenado
Pr 12.45
Brake apply Hz
Pr 12.44 Enclenchement des freins
Brake release Hz Bremsenaktivierungs
Desserrage des freins Inserimento freno
Bremsfreigabe / Rilascio freno Activación del freno
Desactivación del freno
Pr 5.01 Motor Hz
Pr 12.42 Pr 4.01 Magnitude / Intensité

Upper current Scheinstrom / Valore assoluto
threshold Magnitud (A)
Seuil supérieur
actuel Pr 10.02 Drive active / Variateur actif

Oberer Motor bestromt / Convertitore attivo
Stromschwellenwert Accionamiento activo
Soglia alta corrente
Umbral de Pr 1.11 Ref on / à /
intensidad máximo Sollwert ein
Rif. attivato / Ref activada
Pr 12.40 Brake release / Relâchement
des freins / Bremsfreigabe Rilascio
freno / Desactivación del freno
Pr 2.03 Ramp hold / Maintien de la
rampe / Rampe stop / Mantenimento
rampa / Retención de rampa
1 2 3 4 5 6
Pr 12.46 Pr 12.47
1. Wait for upper current threshold and brake release frequency 1. Attendere che il flusso attraversi il motore (solo modo vettoriale in
2. Pre-brake release delay anello chiuso)
3. Post-brake release delay 2. Ritardo rilascio pre-frenatura
4. Wait for brake apply frequency 3. Ritardo rilascio post-frenatura
5. Wait for zero frequency 4. Attendere frequenza inserimento freno
6. 1s delay as phase 2 of stopping sequence (Pr 6.01=1,2 or 3) 5. Attendere frequenza zero
1. Attente du seuil supérieur actuel et de la fréquence de desserrage 6. 1s delay as phase 2 of stopping sequence (Pr 6.01=1,2 o 3)
des freins 1. Espere a que se alcance el umbral de intensidad máximo y la frecuencia
2. Retard de relâchement des pré-freins de desactivación del freno
3. Retard de relâchement des post-freins 2. Intervalo anterior a la desactivación del freno
4. Attente de la fréquence d'enclenchement des freins 3. Intervalo posterior a la desactivación del freno
5. Attente de la fréquence zéro
4. Espere a que se alcance la frecuencia de activación del freno
6. Retard d'1s comme phase 2 de séquence d'arrêt (Pr 6.01 = 1, 2 ou 3)
5. Espere a que se alcance la frecuencia cero
1. Auf oberen Grenzstrom und Bremsfreigabefrequenz warten
6. 1º intervalo como fase 2 de la secuencia de parada (Pr 6.01=1, 2 ó 3)
2. Verzögerung vor der Bremsfreigabe
3. Verzögerung nach der Bremsfreigabe
4. Auf Bremsaktivierungsfrequenz warten
5. Auf Nullfrequenz warten
6. 1 s Verzögerung als Phase 2 der Stopsequenz (Pr 6.01 = 1, 3 oder 3)

CL> Brake function / Fonction de freinage / Bremsfunktion / Funzione frenatura /
English
Función de frenado
Enable position controller during brake release
Activation du contrôleur de position
Drive active Lageregelung während der Position control ( = 1)
Variateur actif Bremsfreigabe aktivieren Commande de position
Motor bestromt Abilitazione posizione controller 13.10
Lageregelungsmodus
Convertitore attivo Activar controlador de posición Controllo posizione
Accionamiento activo 12.49 Control de posición
Motor Flux / Fluss +
Flusso / Flujo Post-brake release delay
7/8 x Nominal flux _ 10.02 Ramp hold
Retard de relâchement des post-freins
Verzögerung nach der Bremsfreigabe 12.47 Maintien de la rampe
Magnitude / Intensité Ritardo rilascio post-frenatura 2.03 Rampe stop
Scheinstrom / Valore assoluto Intervalo anterior a desactivación del freno Mantenimento rampa
Magnitud (A) i Retención de rampa
_ LAT
4.01
r
Français Deutsch
+
Brake release
Lower 1 Relâchement des freins
current
threshold 12.43 12.40 Bremsfreigabe
10.02 12.48 Rilascio freno
Seuil inférieur actuel 1
Unterer Stromschwellenwert Desactivación del freno
Brake controller
Soglia bassa corrente Drive active Contrôleur de freins
Umbral de intensidad mínimo Variateur actif Bremsregler Hold zero speed
VT = 0 12.41 6.08
Umrichter aktiv Controller Maintien vitesse zéro
Ref on / à SV = 1 Aktivieren Halten
Convertitore attivo freno / Controlador
Sollwert ein Pr 12.48 (Freigabe)
Accionamiento activo de freno
Rif. attivato Brake apply delay Mantenimento velocità
Ref 1.11 T25 Digital(i) I/O / E/S / E/A 2 Retard d'enclenchement des freins zero
activada OR
E/S numérique 2 Verzögerung der Bremsaktivierung Mantener velocidad cero
8.12 Invert / Inversion(e) Ritardo inserimento freno
Speed feedback 12.46 Intervalo de aplicación del freno
Rétroaction de vitesse
Source/Destination / Quell/
Drehzahlistwert 8.22 Zielparameter / Sorgente/
Retroazione Destinazione / Origen/Destino
velocità 3.02 + Output select / Sélection sortie
Realimen- 8.32 Auswahl als Ausgang
tación de _
Selezione uscita / Selec. salida
velocidad
Pr 12.46
Pre-brake release delay
Retard de relâchement 8.17 Invert / Inversion(e)
12.45 des post-freins
Verzögerung vor der Bremsfreigabe Source / Quell / Sorgente /
Brake apply rpm 8.27 Origen
Ritardo rilascio pre-frenatura
Enclenchement des freins Intervalo anterior a desactivación
Bremsenaktivierungs del freno
Inserimento freno
Activación del freno
CL> Brake sequence / Séquence de freinage / Bremssequenz / Sequenza di

frenatura / Secuencia de frenado
Pr 12.45
Brake apply Hz
Enclenchement des freins
Italiano
Bremsenaktivierungs
Inserimento freno
Activación del freno Pr 5.01 Motor Hz
Pr 4.01 Magnitude / Intensité

Scheinstrom / Valore assoluto
Magnitud (A)
Pr 10.02 Drive active / Variateur actif
Motor bestromt / Convertitore attivo
Accionamiento activo
Pr 1.11 Ref on / à /
Sollwert ein
Rif. attivato / Ref activada
Pr 12.40 Brake release / Relâchement
des freins / Bremsfreigabe Rilascio Español International
freno / Desactivación del freno
Pr 2.03 Ramp hold / Maintien de la
rampe / Rampe stop / Mantenimento
rampa / Retención de rampa
Pr 13.10 Position control / Commande de
position / Lageregelungsmodus
Pr 6.08 Hold zero speed
Maintien vitesse zéro
Aktivieren Halten
(Freigabe)
1 2 3 4 5 Mantenimento velocità
zero
Mantener velocidad cero
Pr 12.47 Pr 12.46 Pr 12.48
1. Wait for motor fluxed (VT) 1. Attendere che il flusso attraversi il motore (VT)
2. Post-brake release delay 2. Ritardo rilascio post-frenatura
3. Wait for speed threshold 3. Attendere la soglia di velocità
4. Attendere il ritardo velocità di inserimento freno
4. Wait for brake apply speed delay
5. Ritardo inserimento freno
5. Brake apply delay
1. Attente du flux du moteur (VT) 1. Espere hasta alcanzar el flujo del motor (VT)
2. Retard de relâchement des post-freins 2. Intervalo posterior a la desactivación del freno
3. Attente du seuil de vitesse 3. Espere hasta alcanzar el umbral de velocidad
4. Attente du retard de vitesse d'enclenchement des freins 4. Espere hasta el intervalo de velocidad de activación del freno
5. Retard d'enclenchement des freins 5. Intervalo de velocidad de activación del freno
1. Warten auf Stromfluss durch Motor (VT)
2. Verzögerung nach der Bremsfreigabe
3. Warten auf Drehzahlgrenze
4. Warten auf Verzögerung der Bremsaktivierungsdrehzahl
5. Verzögerung der Bremsaktivierung

Menu 13: Position control / Contrôle de position / Lageregelung / Controllo della

English
posizione / Control de posición
OL>
Français Deutsch
Reverse / Arrière Enable / Activation

Linkslauf / Inversione Freigeben / Abilitazione
Relative jog ref inversa Activación
Pas-à-pas relative ref
13.19 13.18
Position control reference position Sollwert für relatives Tippen
Lageregelung: Positionssollwert Rif. jog relativo
Rev. Counter Ref de velocidad lenta relativa
Comptetours Position 13.17 0
Umdrehungszähler Fine 1
1
Contagiri Fein
Cuentar Position Adecuada x(-1)
Position controller ref 0
Source
Encoder 3.28 3.29 3.30 Lageregler:
Codificador Quellparameter 13.04
für Sollwert Position ref
Sorgente / Origen Invert
Slot 1 15.04 15.05 15.06 13.06 Ratio / Rapport
0 Verhältnis
Rapporto
1 D Position Coeficiente +
Slot 2 16.04 16.05 16.06 2 0
3 1
13.07
13.08
+
ò +
x(-1) _
4 Position
Slot 3 17.04 17.05 17.06 Error reset
Italiano
Réinitialisation erreur 13.16

Lageabweichung zurücksetzen
Reset errore
Local Eliminación de error
Ref / Rif 13.20 13.21 13.22 0
Sollwert ò
Ignore local ref turns 1 Local ref
Ignorer les tours de Disable / Désactivation
13.24
référence locale Sollwert deaktivieren
Lokale Sollwertumdrehungen Disabilitazione
13.23
ignorieren Desact.
Ignora rotazioni del riferimento locale
Ignorar revoluciones de referencia
local
Position control feedback position

Rétroaction / Lageregelung:
Positionsistwert / Retroazione
Realimentación
Rev. Counter Position controller
Comptetours Position Feedback source
Umdrehungszähler Fine Source de rétroaction
Contagiri Fein Lageregler: Quellparameter
Cuentar Position Adecuada für Rückführungssignal
Sorgente retroazione
Encoder Origen de realimentación
3.28 3.29 3.30
Codificador 13.05
Slot 1 15.04 15.05 15.06

0
1 D Position
Slot 2 16.04 16.05 16.06 2
3
Slot 3 17.04 17.05 17.06

English
Pre ramp ref. Post ramp ref.
Sollwert vor Rampe Sollwert nach Rampe
Hz ref Rif. prerampa Rif. Postrampa
Ref. anterior a rampa Ref. posterior a rampa
1.01 0
Menu 2
1.03 Ramp Control 2.01
1
Velocity feed-forward ref.
Réf. action prévisionnelle de vitesse
Sollwert für Drehzahlvorsteuerung Feed-forward
Riferimento velocità feed-forward Action prévisionnelle
Ref. de realimentación positiva de velocidad 1.39 1.40 Drehzehlvorsteuerung
Français Deutsch
Realimentación positiva
Position controller eleccionada
Mode / Modo /
Lageregelung: Modus
13.10 13.10 = 1 or 2
Pos. loop
disabled
désactivée
deaktivier
disabilitazione
desactivado 0
1 +
2 _
Position loop error

Erreur boucle de position
Schleppfehler Lageregelkreis Position cont
Errore anello posizione P Gain / Guadagno
Error de bucle de posición Ganancia
P-Verstärkung
13.01 13.02 13.03 13.09
Revs / Tours Pos. Pos.

Umdrehungen Fine / Fein
Giro
Italiano
13.12
Position cont.
Speed clamp
Limitation de vitesse
Lageregler: Drehzahlbegrenzung
Protezione velocità
Bloqueo de velocidad

CL>
English
Français Deutsch
Reverse / Arrière Enable / Activation

Linkslauf / Inversione Freigeben / Abilitazione
Relative jog ref inversa Activación
Pas-à-pas relative ref
13.19 13.18
Position control reference position Sollwert für relatives Tippen
Lageregelung: Positionssollwert Rif. jog relativo
Rev. Counter Ref de velocidad lenta relativa
Comptetours Position 13.17 0
Umdrehungszähler Fine 1
1
Contagiri Fein
Cuentar Position Adecuada x(-1)
Position controller ref 0
Source
Encoder 3.28 3.29 3.30 Lageregler:
Codificador Quellparameter 13.04
für Sollwert Position ref
Slot 1 15.04 15.05 15.06 13.06 Ratio / Rapport
0 Verhältnis
Rapporto
1 D Position Coeficiente +
Slot 2 16.04 16.05 16.06 2 0
3 1
13.07
13.08
+
ò +
x(-1) _
4 Position
Slot 3 17.04 17.05 17.06 Error reset
Réinitialisation erreur 13.16
Lageabweichung zurücksetzen
Reset errore
Local Eliminación de error
Ref / Rif 13.20 13.21 13.22 0
Sollwert ò
Ignore local ref turns 1
Ignorer les tours de 13.24
référence locale Local ref
Lokale Sollwertumdrehungen Disable / Désactivation
ignorieren 13.23
Sollwert deaktivieren
Ignora rotazioni del riferimento locale Disabilitazione
Ignorar revoluciones de referencia Desact.
Italiano
local
Position control feedback position

Rétroaction / Lageregelung:
Positionsistwert / Retroazione
Realimentación Position controller
Rev. Counter Feedback source
Comptetours Position Source de rétroaction
Umdrehungszähler Fine Lageregler: Quellparameter
Contagiri Fein für Rückführungssignal
Cuentar Position Adecuada Sorgente retroazione
Origen de realimentación
Encoder 3.28 3.29 3.30
Codificador 13.05
Slot 1 15.04 15.05 15.06

0
1 D Position _
Slot 2 16.04 16.05 16.06 2

3 +
Ltd
± /2 rev
1
Slot 3 17.04 17.05 17.06

Orient. pos. ref / rif
Sollwert für Spindelorientierung 13.13
*For more information, refer to Position Modes in the Unidrive SP User Guide on the CD
Rom supplied with the drive.
*Pour de plus amples informations, voir les Modes Position dans le Guide d'utilisation
Unidrive SP sur le CD Rom fourni avec le variateur.
*Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter den Lageregelungs Modi in der
Betriebsanleitung Unidrive SP auf der beiliegenden CD.
*Per ulteriori informazioni, vedere Modi della posizione nella Guida Unidrive SP
dell'utente contenuta nel CD Rom fornito con il convertitore.
*Para obtener más información, consulte Modos de posición en la Guía del usuario del
Unidrive SP contenida en el CD que se suministra con el accionamiento.

English
Pre ramp ref. / Sollwert vor Rampe
Hz ref Rif. prerampa / Ref. anterior a rampa
1.01 0
Menu 2 + 3.01
1.03 Ramp Control 2.01
1
Velocity feed-forward ref. + Slave
Post ramp ref. Asservissante
Réf. action prévisionnelle de vitesse Sollwert nach Rampe
Sollwert für Drehzahlvorsteuerung 1.39 Feed-forward Richiesta
Rif. Postrampa Secundaria
Riferimento velocità feed-forward Action prévisionnelle Ref. posterior a rampa
Ref. de realimentación positiva de velocidad 1.40 Drehzehlvorsteuerung rpm demand
Realimentación positiva
Position controller eleccionada
Mode / Modo /
Lageregelung: Modus
Pos. loop 13.10 = 13.10 = 13.10 =
13.10 3.23
disabled 5 or 6 1 or 3 1~6
désactivée Hard speed ref 1 0
deaktivier Réf. haute vitesse
Français Deutsch
disabilitazione 0 Zusatzsollwert freigeben
desactivado Rif. velocità reale
1 Ref. de velocidad fija
2 0
3
1 1
4
1 5
6
0 Hard speed ref
Réf. haute vitesse
Zusatzsollwert 3.22
Rif. velocità reale
6.08 Ref. de velocidad fija
Hold zero speed enable
Activation Maintien vitesse zéro
Aktivieren Halten (Freigabe)
Mantenimento velocità zero
Mantener velocidad cero
Position loop error
Erreur boucle de position
Schleppfehler Lageregelkreis Position cont
Errore anello posizione P Gain / Guadagno
0 Error de bucle de posición Ganancia
P-Verstärkung
1
1 13.01 13.02 13.03 13.09
0
Revs / Tours Pos. Pos.
Umdrehungen Fine / Fein
Giro
13.12
Position cont.
Pos. loop Speed clamp
Enabled Limitation de vitesse
Activée Lageregler: Drehzahlbegrenzung
Abilitazione Protezione velocità
Activado Bloqueo de velocidad
Lageregelkreis
deaktiviert
Italiano
Orientation acceptance window
Fenêtre d'acceptation orientation
Fenster für Spindelorientierung 13.14
Finestra accettazione orientamento
Ventana de aceptación de orientación
Orientation Español International

Spindelorientierung
Orientation position complete

Orientation position atteinte
Spindelorientierung OK 13.15
Posizione orientamento completa
Posición de orientación completa

Menu 14: User PID controller / Régulateur PID de l’utilisateur / PID-Regler /

English
Controller PID da utente / Controlador PID de usuario
Main reference source
Source de la référence principale
Quell für Leitwert
Sorgente riferimento principale
Origen de referencia principal
14.02
PID Principle ref

PID-Regler: Leitwert
??.??
14.19
Français Deutsch
??.??
PID ref
Source / Quell
14.03 Inversion(e)
Slew-rate limit
14.05 Vitesse d'avancement
PID ref Anstiegsbegrenzung
PID-Regler: Sollwert Limite di tempo variazione PID error
??.?? Límite de velocidad Fehler
14.20 0 de exploración
+
14.07 14.22
??.??
1 _
x(-1)
PID Feedback source
Source de la rétroaction PID Invert
PID-Regler:Quel für Istwertsignal 14.04 PID Feedback Inversion(e)
Sorgente retroazione PID Rétroaction
Istwertsignal 14.06
Origen de realimentación PID
Retroazione
Realimentación
??.??
14.21 0
??.??
1
x(-1)
PID Enable / Activation

Freigeben / Abilitazione
Activación
14.08
Italiano
Drive normal
Variateur en ordre
Umrichter
betriebsbereit
Azionamento
10.01 &
normale Logic 1
Accionamiento normal
1
??.??
0
??.??
Source not used

14.09 Source non utilisée
Optional PID enable source Quell nicht verzeigert
Source activation PID en option Sorgente non utilizzata
PID-Regler: Quell für optionale Freigabe Origen no usado
Sorgente abilitazione PID opzionale
Origen de activación de PID opcional

English
Français Deutsch
PID output high limit
PID hold integrator
Limite supérieure de sortie
Intégrateur de maintien PID 14.13 Ausgangssignal (Obergrenze)
PID-Regler: Integrator 14.10
Limite massimo uscita
Integratore congelamento PID PID P Gain Límite superior de salida
Integrador de mantenimiento PID Verstärkung Destination
14.14 Limit(e) low / inférieure / minimo
14.17 Guadagno inferior / Untergrenze Zielparameter
Ganancia
PID symmetrical limits 14.16
14.18
14.11 Symmetrische Begrenzung
PID I Gain
Verstärkung +
Guadagno ??.??
Ganancia +
14.01 14.15
14.12 PID output ??.??
PID D Gain PID controller scale factor
Verstärkung Output / Sortie Facteur d'échelle de sortie
Guadagno Uscita / Salida Ausgangsskalierung
Ganancia Ausgangssignal Fattore di scala uscita
Factor de escala de salida
Italiano
*The PID controller is only controlled if Pr 14.16 is set to a non Pr xx.00 and unprotected destination
parameter.
*Le régulateur PID n'est contrôlé que si Pr 14.16 est réglé de manière différente que Pr xx.00 et à un
paramètre de destination non protégée.
*Der PID-Regler ist nur funktionsfähig, wenn Pr 14.16 auf einen Wert gesetzt ist, der keinem
Pr xx.00 und ungeschützten Zielparameter entspricht.
*Il controller PID viene controllato solamente se il Pr 14.16 è impostato a un parametro di
destinazione non protetto e che non sia un Pr xx.00.
*El controlador PID se controla si Pr 14.16 se ajusta en un parámetro de destino distinto de Pr xx.00
y sin proteger.

Menus 15, 16 & 17: Solutions Module set-up / Installation du module Solutions /
English
Konfiguration von Solutions-Modulen / Impostazione del Modulo soluzioni /
Configuración del módulo de resolución
Parameters common to all Solutions Modules. Refer to the Solutions Module user guide
for more information.
Paramètres communs à tous les Modules Solutions. Se reporter au guide d'utilisation
du Module Solutions pour plus d'informations.
Gemeinsame Parameter für alle Solutions Module. Weitere Informationen finden sie in
den jeweiligen Handbüchern der Solutions Module.
Français Deutsch
Parametri comuni a tutti i Solution Modules.Per maggiori informazioni far riferimento alla
User Guide per i Solution Modules.
Los parámetros son comunes a todos los Módulos. Ver la Guía de Usuario del Módulo
de Soluciones para mas información
Parameter
Solutions ID du module Solutions-Modul: ID del Modulo ID de módulo de
x.01
Module ID Solutions Kennung opzionale resolución
Solutions Lecture mise en
Fehlerzustand des Stato errore del Estado de error de
x.50 Module error sécurité du module
Solutions-Moduls Modulo opzionale módulo de resolución
status Solutions
Pr x.01 Module / Modul /Modulo /Módulo

No module fitted
Aucun module installé
0 kein Modul im Steckplatz
Nessun modulo installato
Ningún módulo instalado
101 SM-Resolver
Italiano
102 SM-Universal Encoder Plus

104 SM-Encoder Plus
201 SM-I/O Plus
203 SM-I/O Timer
204 SM-I/O PELV
205 SM-I/O 24V Protected
206 SM-I/O120V
207 SM-I/O Lite

208 SM-I/O 32
301 SM-Applications
302 SM-Applications Lite
303 SM-EZMotion
304 SM-Applications Plus
401 SM-LON
403 SM-PROFIBUS-DP
404 SM-INTERBUS
406 SM-CAN
407 SM-DeviceNet
408 SM-CANopen
409 SM-SERCOS
410 SM-Ethernet
501 SM-SLM

Menu 18, 19 & 20: Application menu 1, 2 & 3 / Anwendungsmenü 1, 2 & 3 / Menu delle
English
applicazioni 1, 2 & 3 / Menú de aplicaciones 1, 2 & 3
Parameter
Nombre entier
Gespeicherter Valore intero salvato
18.01 (1) Power-down saved sauvegardé à la Entero guardado al
ganzzahliger Wert allo scollegamento
19.01 (2) integer coupure apagar
bei Netz Aus dell'alimentazione
d'alimentation
Nombre entier
18.02 - 18.10 (1) Ganzzahliger Valore intero in sola Entero de sólo
Read-only integer lecture
19.02 - 19.10 (2) Wert lettura lectura
seulement
Français Deutsch
18.11 - 18.30 (1)
Nombre entier Ganzzahliger Valore intero in Entero de lectura-
19.11 - 19.30 (2) Read-write integer
lectureécriture Wert lettura-scrittura escritura
20.01 - 20.20 (3)
18.31 - 18.50 (1) Bit de lectura-
Read-write bit Bit lecture-écriture Bitwert Bit in lettura-scrittura
19.31 - 19.50 (2) escritura
Nombre entier long
Read-write long Ganzzahliger Long- Valore intero lungo in Entero largo de
20.21 - 20.40 (3) de
integer Wert lettura-scrittura lectura-escritura
lecture-écriture
Menu 21: Second motor parameters / Paramètres du deuxième moteur / Zweiter

Motorparametersatz / Parametri del secondo motore / Parámetros del motor auxiliar
Parameter
Maximum reference Limitation de Sollwertbegrenzung Protezione Bloqueo de
21.01 {0.02}
clamp référence max. (Maximum) riferimento massimo referencia máxima
Minimum reference Limitation de Sollwertbegrenzung Protezione Bloqueo de
21.02 {0.01}
clamp référence minimum (Minimum) riferimento minimo referencia mínima
Sélecteur de Auswahl Selector de
21.03 Reference selector Selettore riferimento {0.05}
référence Sollwertquelle referencia
Tempo di Velocidad de
21.04 Acceleration rate Taux d'accélération Beschleunigungszeit {0.03}
accelerazione aceleración
Tempo di Velocidad de
21.05 Deceleration rate Taux de décélération Verzögerungszeit {0.04}
decelerazione deceleración
Italiano
21.06 Rated frequency Fréquence nominale Nennfrequenz Frequenza nominale Frecuencia nominal {0.47}
21.07 Rated current Courant nominal Nennstrom Corrente nominale Intensidad nominal {0.46}
Charge nominale tr./ Velocità nominale in Rpm nominal con
21.08 Rated load rpm Nenndrehzahl min-1 {0.45}
min. condizioni di carico carga
21.09 Rated voltage Tension nominale Nennspannung Tensione nominale Tensión nominal {0.44}
Fattore di potenza Factor de potencia
21.10 Rated power factor Facteur de puissance Leistungsfaktor {0.43}
nominale nominal
Number of motor Nombre de pôles du Numero di poli del Número de polos de
21.11 Anzahl der Motorpole {0.42}
poles moteur motore motor
Resistencia de
21.12 Stator resistance Résistance du stator Ständerwiderstand Resistenza statorica Español International
estátor
Compensación de
21.13 Voltage offset Décalage de tension Spannungs-Offset Offset di tensione
tensión
Transient inductance Inductance transitoire Induttanza transitoria Inductancia
21.14 (σL Streuinduktivität (σLs)
s) (σLs) (σLs) transitoria (σLs)
Activation du moteur
21.15 Motor 2 active Motor 2 aktiv Motore 2 attivo Motor 2 activo
2
Thermal time Constante de temps Thermische Costante temporale Constante de tiempo
21.16 {0.45}
constant thermique Zeitkonstante termica térmica
Ganancia Kp de
Speed controller Kp Gain Kp du Drehzahlregler: Kp- Guadagno Kp del
21.17 controlador de {0.07}
gain contrôleur de vitesse Verstärkung controller di velocità
velocidad
Ganancia Ki de
Speed controller Ki Gain Ki du contrôleur Drehzahlregler: Ki- Guadagno Ki del
gain de vitesse Verstärkung controller di velocità
velocidad
Ganancia Kd de
Speed controller Kd Gain Kd du Drehzahlregler: Kd- Guadagno Kd del
gain contrôleur de vitesse Verstärkung controller di velocità
velocidad
Angle de phase Encoder: Angolo di fase Ángulo de fase de
21.20 Encoder phase angle {0.43}
encodeur Phasenwinkel dell'encoder codificador

Parameter
English
Selector de
Speed feedback Sélecteur rétroaction Auswahl Selettore retroazione
21.21 realimentación de
selector vitesse Drehzahlrückführung della velocità
velocidad
Gain Kp contrôleur Ganancia Kp de
Current controller Kp Stromregler: Kp- Guadagno Kp
21.22 de controlador de {0.38}
gain Verstärkung controller di corrente
courant intensidad
Ganancia Ki de
Current controller Ki Gain Ki contrôleur de Stromregler: Ki- Guadagno Ki
gain courant Verstärkung controller di corrente
intensidad
Ständerinduktivität Induttanza statorica Inductancia de
21.24 Stator inductance (Ls) Inductance stator (Ls) (L ) (Ls) estátor (Ls)
s
Français Deutsch
Point d'arrêt de Stützpunkt für Motor-

Motor saturation Punto di saturazione Punto crítico de
21.25 saturation du moteur magnetisierungs-
breakpoint 1 1 motore saturación de motor 1
1 kennlinie 1
Point d'arrêt de Stützpunkt für Motor-
Motor saturation Punto di saturazione Punto crítico de
21.26 saturation du moteur magnetisierungs-
breakpoint 2 2 motore saturación de motor 2
2 kennlinie 2
Limite de courant Motorische Limite di corrente per Límite de intensidad
21.27 Motoring current limit
moteur Stromgrenze motorizzazione motriz
Limite du courant de Generatorische Limite corrente di Límite de intensidad
21.28 Regen current limit
régénération Stromgrenze rigenerazione regenerativa
Symmetrical current Limite du courant Symmetrische Limite di corrente Límite de intensidad
21.29 {0.06}
limit symétrique Stromgrenze simmetrica simétrica
Motor volts per 1,000 Volts moteur par Motorspannung pro Volt motore per 1.000 Voltios de motor cada
21.30 rpm, Ke 1.000 tr./min., Ke 1 000 min-1, Ke giri/min., Ke 1.000 rpm, Ke
Pas polaire du Passo polare del Número de Polos del
21.31 Motor pole pitch Motor Polteilung
moteur motore motor
Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up / Configuration du menu 0 additionnel /

Zusätzliche Konfiguration des Menü 0 / Impostazioni addizionali Menu 0 /
Configuración adicional del Menú 0
Italiano
Parameter
22.01 Pr 0.31 set-up Configuration du Pr 0.31 Einstellen von Pr 0.31 Impostazione del Pr 0.31 Configuración de Pr 0.31

10.15 SMARTCARD
English
Français Deutsch
The SMARTCARD is located at the top of the module under the drive display (if fitted)
on the left-hand side.
Size 0: Ensure the SMARTCARD is inserted with the contacts facing the left-hand side
of the drive.
Size 1 to 6: Ensure the SMARTCARD is inserted with the contacts facing the right-hand
side of the drive.
La SMARTCARD se trouve dans la partie supérieure du module, à gauche sous
l’affichage du variateur (si installé).
Taille 0: Veillez à ce que la SMARTCARD soit correctement insérée, les contacts devant
être orientés vers le côté gauche du variateur.
Italiano
Tailles 1 à 6: Veillez à ce que la SMARTCARD soit correctement insérée, les contacts
devant être orientés vers le côté droit du variateur.
Die SMARTCARD befindet sich auf an der Oberseite des Moduls unter dem Umrichter-
Display (falls vorhanden) auf der linken Seite.
Baugröße 0: Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die SMARTCARD so eingesetzt ist, dass
deren Kontakte auf der linken Umrichterseite liegen.
Baugrößen 1 bis 6: Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die SMARTCARD so eingesetzt ist,
dass deren Kontakte auf der rechten Umrichterseite liegen. Español International
La SMARTCARD è situata nella parte superiore del modulo, sotto il display del
convertitore (se presente) a sinistra.
Taglia 0: Accertarsi che la SMARTCARD sia inserita con i contatti rivolti verso il lato
sinistro del convertitore.
Taglie 1 a 6: Accertarsi che la SMARTCARD sia inserita con i contatti rivolti verso il lato
destro del convertitore.
La tarjeta SMARTCARD se encuentra situada a la izquierda en la parte superior del
módulo, debajo de la pantalla del accionamiento (si está instalada).
Tamaño 0: Asegúrese de insertar la SMARTCARD con los contactos orientados hacia
el lado izquierdo del accionamiento.
Tamaños 1 a 6: Asegúrese de insertar la SMARTCARD con los contactos orientados
hacia el lado derecho del accionamiento.

Easy saving and reading / Sauvegardes et lecture simples / Einfaches Speichern und
English
Lesen von Parametern / Facilità di salvataggio e di lettura / Fácil almacenamiento y lectura
Pr 0.30 = rEAd + Pr 0.30 = Prog +

Boot
Français Deutsch
Auto
Save Auto Save
Pr 0.30 = Auto + Pr 0.30 = boot +
The SMARTCARD has 999 individual data block locations. Each individual location from
1 to 499 can be used to store data until the capacity of the SMARTCARD is used. The
drive can support SMARTCARDs with a capacity of between 4kB and 512kB.
The data block locations of the SMARTCARD are arranged to have the following usage:
SMARTCARD data blocks
Data block Type Example use
1 to 499 Read/Write Application set-ups
500 to 999 Read only Macros
Data transfer to or from the SMARTCARD is indicated by one the following:

• SM-Keypad: The decimal point after the fourth digit in the upper display will flash.
• SM-Keypad Plus: The symbol 'CC' will appear in the lower left hand corner of the display
The card should not be removed during data transfer, as the drive will produce a trip. If
Italiano
this occurs then either the transfer should be reattempted or in the case of a card to
drive transfer, default parameters should be loaded.
Transferring data
Data transfer, erasing and protecting the information is performed by entering a code in
Pr xx.00 and then resetting the drive as shown.
SMARTCARD codes
Code Action
Transfer drive parameters as difference from defaults to a bootable SMARTCARD block in data block
2001
number 001
3yyy Transfer drive parameters to a SMARTCARD block number yyy
4yyy Transfer drive data as difference from defaults to SMARTCARD block number yyy
5yyy Transfer drive Onboard PLC program to SMARTCARD block number yyy
6yyy Transfer SMARTCARD data block yyy to the drive
7yyy Erase SMARTCARD data block yyy
8yyy Compare drive parameters with block yyy
9555 Clear SMARTCARD warning suppression flag (V01.07.00 and later)
9666 Set SMARTCARD warning suppression flag (V01.07.00 and later)
9777 Clear SMARTCARD read-only flag
9888 Set SMARTCARD read-only flag
9999 Erase SMARTCARD
Where yyy indicates the block number 001 to 999.
NOTE If the read only flag is set then only codes 6yyy or 9777 are effective.

La SMARTCARD contient 999 emplacements de blocs de données différents. Les
English
emplacements correspondant aux blocs 1 à 499 peuvent être utilisés pour stocker des
données jusqu’à épuisement de la capacité de la SMARTCARD. Le variateur peut
prendre en charge des SMARTCARD dont la capacité se situe entre 4 et 512 Ko. Les
emplacements des blocs de données sur la SMARTCARD sont agencés pour les
usages suivants :
Blocs de données de la SMARTCARD
Bloc de données Type Exemple d’utilisation
1 à 499 Lecture/Écriture Configuration d’applications
Français Deutsch
500 à 999 Lecture seulement Macros
Le transfert de données effectué sur ou à partir de la SMARTCARD est indiqué par les
éléments suivants :
• SM-Keypad : le séparateur décimal après le quatrième chiffre sur l’écran
d’affichage supérieur s’allume.
• SM-Keypad Plus : le symbole « CC » apparaît dans l’angle inférieur gauche de
l’affichage.
Vous ne devez pas retirer la carte pendant le transfert de données, sinon le variateur
déclenche une mise en sécurité. Si cela venait à se produire, le transfert doit être
relancé ou, dans le cas du transfert des données de la carte sur le variateur, les
paramètres par défaut doivent être chargés.
Transfert de données
Les fonctions de transfert de données, de suppression et de protection des informations
sont accessibles via la saisie d’un code dans Pr xx.00 et le reset du variateur, comme
expliqué dans le tableau.
Codes SMARTCARD
Code Action
Italiano
Transfert des données du variateur dont les valeurs sont différentes des valeurs par défaut dans un bloc
2001
de données SMARTCARD en mode Boot dont le numéro est 001
3yyy Transfert des paramètres du variateur dans un bloc de la SMARTCARD dont le numéro est yyy
Transfert des données du variateur dont les valeurs sont différentes des valeurs par défaut dans un bloc
4yyy
de la SMARTCARD dont le numéro est yyy
Transfert d’un programme PLC interne au variateur dans un bloc de la SMARTCARD dont le numéro
5yyy
est yyy
6yyy Transfert du bloc de données yyy de la SMARTCARD sur le variateur
7yyy Suppression du bloc de données yyy de la SMARTCARD
8yyy Comparaison des paramètres du variateur avec le bloc yyy
Effacement de l’indicateur de suppression d’avertissement de la SMARTCARD (version 01.07.00 et
9555
ultérieure)
Définition de l’indicateur de suppression d’avertissement de la SMARTCARD (version 01.07.00 et
9666
ultérieure)
9777 Effacement de l’indicateur de lecture seule de la SMARTCARD
9888 Définition de l’indicateur de lecture seule de la SMARTCARD
9999 Suppression des données de la SMARTCARD
Où yyy correspond au numéro du bloc (de 001 à 999).
NOTE Si l’indicateur de lecture seule est défini, seuls les codes 6yyy ou 9777 sont opérationnels.

Die SMARTCARD besitzt 999 einzelne Datenspeicherblöcke. Jeder einzelne

English
Datenblock von 1 bis 499 kann zur Datenspeicherung verwendet werden, bis die
Speicherkapazität der SMARTCARD erschöpft ist. Der Umrichter SMARTCARDs mit
einer Kapazität zwischen 4kB und 512kB unterstützen. Die Datenblöcke der
SMARTCARD sind wie folgt angeordnet:
SMARTCARD-Datenblöcke
Datenblock Typ Beispiel für die Verwendung
1 bis 499 Lesen / Schreiben (Read / Write) Anwendungskonfiguration
500 bis 999 Nur Lesen Makros
Français Deutsch
Die Datenübertragung zu oder von der SMARTCARD wird mit einer der folgenden
Methoden angezeigt:
• SM-Bedieneinheit: Der Dezimalpunkt hinter der vierten Ziffer im oberen Display blinkt.
• SM-Bedieneinheit Plus: Das Symbol „CC“ erscheint in der unteren linken Ecke des Displays
Die Karte sollte während der Datenübertragung nicht herausgenommen werden, da in
diesem Fall der Umrichter eine Fehlerabschaltung erzeugt. Ist dies dennoch der Fall,
dann sollte die Übertragung erneut gestartet werden. Bei einer Übertragung von der
Karte auf den Umrichter sind die Standardparameter zu laden.
Daten übertragen
Das Übertragen, Löschen und Schützen von Daten kann durch Eingabe eines Codes in
Pr xx.00 und anschließendes Zurücksetzen des Umrichters, wie in tabelle dargestellt,
durchgeführt werden.
SMARTCARD-Codes
Code Vorgang
Übertragen von Umrichterparametern im Unterschied zu Standardparametern zu einem bootfähigen
2001
SMARTCARD-Block in Datenblocknummer 001
Italiano
3yyy Übertragen von Umrichterparametern zu SMARTCARD-Datenblocknummer yyy

Schreiben von Parameterunterschieden zum Auslieferungszustand zu
4yyy
SMARTCARD-Datenblocknummer yyy
5yyy Übertragen des Onboard-SPS-Programms zu SMARTCARD-Datenblocknummer yyy
6yyy Lesen von SMARTCARD-Datenblocknummer yyy in den Umrichter
7yyy Löschen von SMARTCARD-Datenblocknummer yyy
8yyy Vergleichen von Umrichterparametern mit Datenblock yyy
9555 Zurücksetzen des SMARTCARD Warnungsunterdrückungs-Flags (V01.07.00 und darüber)
9666 Setzen des SMARTCARD Warnungsunterdrückungs-Flags (V01.07.00 und darüber)

9777 Zurücksetzen des Schreibschutz-Flags der SMARTCARD
9888 Setzen des Schreibschutz-Flags der SMARTCARD
9999 Löschen von SMARTCARD-Daten
Hierbei steht yyy für die Blocknummer 001 bis 999.
HINWEIS Bei gesetztem Schreibschutz-Flag haben nur die Codes 6yyy oder 9777 eine Wirkung.

La SMARTCARD dispone di 999 singoli indirizzi di blocchi dati. Ciascuno degli indirizzi
English
da 1 a 499 può essere utilizzato per memorizzare dati sino alla massima capacità della
SMARTCARD. Il convertitore può supportare SMARTCARD con una capacità
compresa tra 4 e 512 kB. Gli indirizzi dei blocchi dati della SMARTCARD sono
organizzati per gli utilizzi seguenti:
Blocchi dati della SMARTCARD
Blocco dati Tipo Esempio d'utilizzo
da 1 a 499 Lettura / Scrittura Impostazioni dell'applicazione
da 500 a 999 Solo lettura Macro
Français Deutsch
Il trasferimento di dati da o verso la SMARTCARD è segnalato da una delle seguenti
indicazioni:
• SM-Keypad: Il punto decimale dopo la quarta cifra nel display superiore lampeggia.
• SM-Keypad Plus: Il simbolo ‘CC’ compare nell'angolo inferiore sinistro del display
Non rimuovere la scheda in fase di trasferimento di dati, in quanto si causerebbe una
condizione di allarme del convertitore. In tal caso, verrebbe ripetuta la procedura di
trasferimento o, nel caso di un trasferimento dati dalla scheda al convertitore,
verrebbero caricati i parametri di default.
Trasferimento dati
Il trasferimento di dati, la cancellazione e la protezione delle informazioni possono
essere eseguiti immettendo un codice nel Pr xx.00 e poi resettando il convertitore come
mostrato nella tabella.
Codici della SMARTCARD
Codice Azione
Trasferimento dei dati del convertitore come differenza dai valori di default al numero di
2001
blocco 001 di una SMARTCARD con funzione di avvio (bootable)
Italiano
3yyy Trasferimento dei dati del convertitore a un numero di blocco yyy della SMARTCARD
Trasferimento dei dati del convertitore come differenza dai valori di default al numero di
4yyy
blocco yyy della SMARTCARD
Trasferimento del programma Onboard PLC del convertitore al numero di blocco yyy della
5yyy
SMARTCARD
6yyy Trasferimento del blocco dati yyy della SMARTCARD al convertitore
7yyy Cancellazione del blocco dati yyy della SMARTCARD
8yyy Confronto dei parametri del convertitore con il blocco dati yyy della SMARTCARD Español International
Cancellazione del flag di soppressione delle segnalazioni di allarme della SMARTCARD
9555
(versione V01.07.00 e successive)
Impostazione del flag di soppressione delle segnalazioni di allarme della SMARTCARD
9666
(versione V01.07.00 e successive)
9777 Cancellazione del flag di sola lettura della SMARTCARD
9888 Impostazione del flag di sola lettura della SMARTCARD
9999 Cancellazione della SMARTCARD
Dove yyy indica il numero di blocco da 001 a 999.
NOTA Se si imposta il flag di sola lettura, allora avranno effetto solo i codici 6yyy o 9777.

La SMARTCARD tiene 999 posiciones de bloques de datos individuales. Todas las

English
posiciones de 1 a 499 se pueden utilizar para almacenar datos, hasta la máxima
capacidad de la SMARTCARD. El accionamiento admite las SMARTCARD con
capacidad entre 4 kB y 512 kB. Las posiciones de bloques de datos de SMARTCARD
están dispuestas para el siguiente uso:
Bloques de datos de SMARTCARD
Bloque de datos Tipo Ejemplo de uso
1 a 499 Lectura/escritura Configuración de aplicaciones
500 a 999 Sólo lectura Macros
Français Deutsch
La transferencia de datos hasta o desde la SMARTCARD se indica de una de estas

maneras:
• SM-Keypad: El punto decimal del cuarto dígito en la indicación superior parpadeará
• SM-Keypad Plus: El símbolo ‘CC’ aparecerá en la esquina inferior izquierda de la
pantalla
La tarjeta no se debe extraer durante la transferencia de datos si no quiere que el
accionamiento genere una desconexión. Si esto ocurre, la transferencia se puede
reintentar, y si se trata de una transferencia de tarjeta a accionamiento, deben cargarse
los parámetros por defecto.
Transferencia de datos
Para transferir, borrar y proteger la información se introduce un código en Pr xx.00, y
después se reinicia el accionamiento como se muestra en la tabla.
Códigos de SMARTCARD
Código Acción
Transferencia de datos del accionamiento a un bloque de SMARTCARD iniciable con número 001
2001
como la diferencia respecto de los valores por defecto
Italiano
3yyy Transferencia de parámetros del accionamiento al bloque de datos de SMARTCARD número yyy
Transferencia de datos del accionamiento al bloque de datos de SMARTCARD con número yyy como
4yyy
la diferencia respecto de los valores por defecto
Transferencia del programa PLC Onboard del accionamiento al bloque de datos de SMARTCARD
5yyy
número yyy
6yyy Transferencia del bloque de datos de SMARTCARD yyy al accionamiento
7yyy Borrado del bloque de datos yyy de SMARTCARD
8yyy Comparación de los parámetros del accionamiento con el bloque yyy
9555 Eliminación de la indicación de supresión de advertencias de SMARTCARD (V01.07.00 y posterior)

9666 Configuración de la indicación de supresión de advertencias de SMARTCARD (V01.07.00 y posterior)
9777 Eliminación de la indicación de sólo lectura de SMARTCARD
9888 Configuración de la indicación de sólo lectura de SMARTCARD
9999 Borrado de SMARTCARD
Donde yyy indica el número del bloque 001 a 999.
NOTA Con esta indicación sólo son efectivos los códigos 6yyy y 9777.

11 UL Listing Information
The Control Techniques UL file number is E171230. Confirmation of UL listing can be
found on the UL website: www.ul.com.
Common UL information
Conformity
The drive conforms to UL listing requirements only when the following are observed:
• The drive is installed in a type 1 enclosure, or better, as defined by UL50
• The ambient temperature does not exceed 40°C (104°F) when the drive is
operating
• The terminal tightening torques specified in section 10.2 on page 288.
• If the drive control stage is supplied by an external power supply (+24V), the
external power supply must be a UL Class 2 power supply
Motor overload protection
The drive provides motor overload protection. The default overload protection level is no
higher than 150% of full-load current (FLC) of the drive in open loop mode and no higher
than 175% of full-load current (FLC) of the drive in closed loop vector or servo modes. It
is necessary for the motor rated current to be entered into Pr 0.46 (or Pr 5.07) for the
protection to operate correctly. The protection level may be adjusted below 150% if
required. Refer to the Unidrive SP User Guide for more information. The drive also
provides motor thermal protection. Refer to the Motor thermal protection section of the
Unidrive SP User Guide.
Overspeed Protection
The drive provides overspeed protection. However, it does not provide the level of
protection afforded by an independent high integrity overspeed protection device.
Power dependant UL information

Unidrive SP size 1 to 6
Conformity
The drive conforms to UL listing requirements only when the following is observed:
Fuses
Size 1 to 3
• The correct UL-listed fast acting fuses (class CC up to 30A and class J above 30A),
e.g. Bussman Limitron KTK series, Gould Amp-Trap ATM series or equivalent, are
used in the AC supply. The drive does not comply with UL if MCBs are used in place
of fuses.
For further details on fusing, refer to section 10.1 on page 283.
Size 4 to 6
• The UL-listed Ferraz HSJ (High speed J class) fuses are used in the AC supply. The
drive does not comply with UL if any other fuses or MCBs are used in place of those
stated.
For further details on fusing, refer to section 10.1 on page 283.
Field wiring
Size 1 to 4
• Class 1 60/75°C (140/167°F) copper wire only is used in the installation
Size 5 and 6
• Class 1 75°C (167°F) copper wire only is used in the installation

Field wiring connectors

Sizes 4 to 6
• UL listed wire connectors are used for terminating power circuit field wiring, e.g.
Ilsco TA series
AC supply specification
The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000rms
symmetrical Amperes at 264Vac rms maximum (200V drives), 528Vac rms maximum
(400V drives) or 600Vac rms maximum (575V and 690V drives).
Maximum continuous output current

The drive models are listed as having the maximum continuous output currents (FLC)
shown in Table 11-1, Table 11-2, Table 11-3 and Table 11-4.
Table 11-1 Maximum continuous output current (200V drives)
Model FLC (A) Model FLC (A)
SP1201 5.2 SP3201 42
SP1202 6.8 SP3202 54
SP1203 9.6 SP4201 68
SP1204 11 SP4202 80
SP2201 15.5 SP4203 104
SP2202 22 SP5201 130
SP2203 28 SP5202 154

SP1401 2.8 SP3401 35
SP1402 3.8 SP3402 43
SP1403 5.0 SP3403 56
SP1404 6.9 SP4401 68
SP1405 8.8 SP4402 83
SP1406 11 SP4403 104
SP2401 15.3 SP5401 138
SP2402 21 SP5402 168
SP2403 29 SP6401 205
SP2404 29 SP6402 236

SP3501 5.4 SP3505 16
SP3502 6.1 SP3506 22
SP3503 8.3 SP3507 27
SP3504 11


SP4601 22 SP5601 84
SP4602 27 SP5602 99
SP4603 36 SP6601 125
SP4604 43 SP6602 144
SP4605 52
SP4606 62
Safety label
The safety label supplied with the connectors and mounting brackets must be placed on
a fixed part inside the drive enclosure where it can be seen clearly by maintenance
personnel for UL compliance.
The label clearly states “CAUTION Risk of Electric Shock Power down unit 10 minutes
before removing cover”.
UL listed accessories
• SM-Keypad • SM-PROFIBUS-DP
• SM-Keypad Plus • SM-DeviceNet
• SM-I/O Plus • SM-I/O Timer
• SM-I/O Lite • SM-I/O 120V
• SM-Ethernet • SM-CAN
• SM-CANopen • SM-INTERBUS
• SM-Universal Encoder Plus • SM-Applications Lite
• SM-Resolver • SM-SLM
• SM-Encoder Plus • SM-Applications
• 15-way D-type converter

1 11
Cons: Polar. signal
signaux / segnali / señal 41 42
Gepolte Signalanschluss-
klemmen
21 31
0V 1
+24V Input / Entrée / Eingang
2
Ingresso / Entrada
Analog freq / speed/vitesse/
drehzahl/veloci. ref 1
0V com./gem.
Signal: Single-ended 3
Monofil / Einseitig 5
geerdetes / Ingresso riferito
a massa / Asimétrica 6
0V com./gem.
Signal: Differential
Différentiels / Differenzielles
Differenziale / Diferencial
4
Analog freq /
speed/vitesse/ 7
drehzahl/veloci.
ref 2
Analog 3 Input / Entrée 8

Eingang / Ingresso / Entrada
(Motor thermistor)
9
Freq / speed/
vitesse/drehzahl/veloci. 10
Torque / Copia / Drehmoment / Par

(Active A / Wirkstrom) 11
0V com./gem.
0V com./gem.
21
22
0V com./gem.
23
At zero speed / Vitesse nulle / Drehzahl Null 24
erreicht / A velocità zero / A velocidad cero
Reset / Réinitialisation / Zurücksetzen / Reinicio 25
Run forward / Marc. avant/adelante / Rechtslauf 26
Run reverse / Marc. arrière/inversa/atrás / Linkslauf 27

1
Analog1/2 input/entrée/eingang/ingresso/entrada
28
2
Jog / Pas à pas / Tippen / Lenta 29
Secure Disable/Drive enable 0V com./gem.
30
Sécurité désactivation/Activation variateur
Signal Reglerfreigabe 31
Disabilitazione Sicura/Abilitazione convertitore
SECURE DISABLE/Activar accionamiento
Status Relay / Relais / Rele 41
Drive / Variateur / Umrichter Betriebsbereit 42
Convertitore / Accionamiento normal
0471-0033-02
EF
Important safety information
Please read...
Sicherheitsinformation
Bitte durchlesen...
Informations de sécurité -
prière de lire attentivement...
Informazioni sulla sicurezza
Leggere prego...
Información de Seguridad
Se ruega leer...
Viktig säkerhetsinformation
Läs före användning !
Belangrijke
veiligheidsinformatie
Lees dit voor aanvang
werkzaamheden...
内含重要安全信息
请务必阅读 ...
Part Number: 0175-7051-05

Issue Number: 5
Copyright © Control Techniques, February 2003
Issue: 5

Contents / Table des Matières / Inhalt / Indice /
Sumario / Innehåll / Inhoudsopgave / 目录
English
1 Important safety information ...................................1
1.1 Enclosure ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Electrical installation .................................................................................... 1
1.3 Setting up, commissioning and maintenance .............................................. 2
1.4 Safety of machinery, and safety-critical applications ................................... 2
1.5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ........................................................... 2
Deutsch
1 Wichtige Sicherheitsinformation .............................3
1.1 Schaltschrank .............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Elektrische Installation ................................................................................. 3
1.3 Einrichtung, Inbetriebnahme und Wartung .................................................. 4
1.4 Sicherheit von Maschinen und sicherheitskritische Anwendungen ............. 5
1.5 Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit (EMV) .................................................. 5
Français
1 Informations de sécurité Importantes ....................6
1.1 Armoire ........................................................................................................ 6
1.2 Installation électrique ................................................................................... 6
1.3 Configuration, mise en service et maintenance ........................................... 7
1.4 Sécurité des machines, et applications de sécurité critique ........................ 8
1.5 Compatibilité électromagnétique (CEM) ...................................................... 8
Italiano
1 Informazioni importanti per la sicurezza ................9
1.1 Contenitore .................................................................................................. 9
1.2 Installazione elettrica ................................................................................... 9
1.3 Messa a punto, messa in opera e manutenzione ...................................... 10
1.4 Sicurezza del macchinario, e applicazioni critiche dal punto di vista
sicurezza .................................................................................................... 11
1.5 Compatibilita' elettromagnetica (EMC) ....................................................... 11
Safety Information Booklet

Español
1 Información Importante de Seguridad ................. 12
1.1 El Armario .................................................................................................. 12
1.2 Instalación Eléctrica ................................................................................... 12
1.3 Configuración, puesta en servicio y mantenimiento .................................. 13
1.4 La Seguridad de la Maquinaria, y aplicaciones de seguridad crítica ......... 14
1.5 Compatibilidad Electromagnética (CEM) ................................................... 14
Svenska
1 Viktig säkerhetsinformation .................................. 15
1.1 Kapsling ..................................................................................................... 15
1.2 Elektrisk installation ................................................................................... 15
1.3 Installation, idrifttagande och underhåll ..................................................... 16
1.4 Säkerhet hos maskiner, samt säkerhetskritiska tillämpningar ................... 16
1.5 Elektromagnetisk kompatibilitet (EMC) ...................................................... 17
Nederlands
1 Belangrijke veiligheidsinformatie ......................... 18
1.1 Inbouw ....................................................................................................... 18
1.2 Elektrische installatie ................................................................................. 18
1.3 Instellen, inregelen en onderhoud ............................................................. 19
1.4 Veiligheid van machines en veiligheidskritische applicaties ...................... 20
1.5 Elektromagnetische compatibiliteit (EMC) ................................................. 20
中文
1 重要安全信息 ............................ 21
1.1 柜体 ....................................................... 21
1.2 电气安装 ................................................... 21
1.3 设定、调试及维护 ........................................... 22
1.4 机械安全及安全至上的应用场合 ............................... 22
1.5 电磁兼容性（EMC） .......................................... 22

English
1 Important safety information
This variable speed drive product (drive) is intended for professional incorporation into complete
equipment or systems. If installed incorrectly it may present a safety hazard. The product uses high
voltages and currents, carries a high level of stored electrical energy, and is used to control mechanical
plant which can cause injury. Close attention is required to the electrical installation and the system
design to avoid hazards either in normal operation or in the event of equipment malfunction. System
design, installation, commissioning and maintenance must be carried out by personnel who have the
necessary training and experience. They must read this safety information and the instruction manual
carefully.
1.1 Enclosure
The drive is intended to be mounted in an enclosure which prevents access except by trained and
authorised personnel, and which prevents the ingress of contamination. It is designed for use in an
environment classified as pollution degree 2 in accordance with IEC 60664-1. This means that only dry,
non-conducting contamination is acceptable.
1.2 Electrical installation

1.2.1 General warning
The voltages used in the unit can cause severe electric shock and/or burns, and could be lethal.
Extreme care is necessary at all times when working with or adjacent to it.
The installation must comply with all relevant safety legislation in the country of use.
1.2.2 Isolation device
The AC supply must be removed from the drive using an approved isolation device before any servicing
work is performed, other than adjustments to the settings or parameters specified in the manual. The
drive contains capacitors which remain charged to a potentially lethal voltage after the supply has been
removed. Allow at least 10 minutes from removing the supply until carrying out any work which may
involve contact with electrical connections to the drive.
1.2.3 Products connected by plug and socket
A special hazard may exist where the drive is incorporated into a product which is connected to the
supply by a plug and socket. When unplugged, the pins of the plug may be connected to the drive
input, which is separated from the charge stored in the capacitor only by semiconductor devices. To
avoid any possibility of electric shock from the pins, if they are accessible, a means must be provided
for automatically isolating the plug from the drive – e.g. a latching contactor.
1.2.4 STOP function
The drive stop function does not remove dangerous voltages from the drive or any external option unit,
nor does it isolate the motor from dangerous voltages.
1.2.5 Earthing (grounding, equipotential bonding)
Except for fully insulated products where no earth connection is provided, the drive must be earthed by
a conductor sufficient to carry the prospective fault current in the event of a fault. The earth connections
shown in the manual must be adhered to.
1.2.6 Fuses
Fuses or over-current protection must be provided at the input in accordance with the instructions in the
manual. Failure to observe the instructions closely may cause a fire hazard.
1.2.7 Over-current protection
The drive has facilities for limiting the motor current, and for removing the supply in the event of
excessive motor temperature. These functions must be set correctly to avoid the risk of the motor over-
heating in the event of mechanical overload or electrical failure.
Safety Information Booklet 1

1.2.8 Isolation of control circuits
The control circuits are isolated from the power circuits in the drive by basic insulation only. The
installer must ensure that the external control circuits are insulated from human contact by at least one
layer of insulation rated for use at the AC supply voltage. If the control circuits are to be connected to
other circuits classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) – for example, to a personal computer – an
additional isolating barrier must be included in order to maintain the SELV classification.
1.2.9 Isolation of control circuits – Cheetah, Puma
The control circuits of these drives are not isolated from the power circuits. They must be
treated in every respect as live at the AC supply potential.
1.2.10 Isolation of control circuits – Maestro range of servo drives
The control circuits of these drives are not isolated from the power circuits. In most applications
an isolating transformer is used to supply the drive, and the negative terminal of the drive DC power
circuit is connected to earth. Provided that the earth connection is adequate to carry the prospective
fault current of the supply, the control circuits may safely be connected to other earthed circuits. If the
negative DC terminal is not connected to earth then the control circuits must be treated as live
at the AC supply potential.
1.2.11 Braking resistors (where applicable)
The precautions described in the instruction manual for braking resistors are essential to avoid the risk
of fire in the event of unexpectedly high braking energy or loss of control of the braking circuit.
1.3 Setting up, commissioning and maintenance

It is essential that changes to the drive settings are given careful consideration. Depending on the
application, a change could have an impact on safety. Appropriate precautions must be taken against
inadvertent changes or tampering. Some specific settings which require particular care
are listed below. This is not an exclusive list, other settings may have an impact on safety in specific
applications.
Automatic start The drive may start unexpectedly in this mode.
Restore default parameter set Depending on the application, this may cause unpredictable or
hazardous operation.
Motor parameters Overheating and possible fire risk could result from seriously incorrect settings.
Do not attempt to carry out internal repairs. Return a faulty drive to the supplier for repair.
1.4 Safety of machinery, and safety-critical applications

Within the European Union all machinery in which this product is used must comply with Directive
97/37/EC, Safety of Machinery.
The drive hardware and software are designed and tested to a high standard, and failures are very
unlikely. However the level of integrity offered by the drive control functions – for example stop/start,
forward/reverse and maximum speed – is not sufficient for use in safety-critical applications
without additional independent channels of protection. All applications where malfunction could
cause injury or loss of life must be subject to a risk assessment, and further protection provided where
needed.
1.5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

The product is designed to high standards of EMC, and data is provided in the EMC data sheet. Under
extreme conditions the product might cause or suffer from disturbance due to electromagnetic
interaction with other equipment. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that the equipment or
system into which the product is incorporated complies with the relevant EMC legislation in the country
of use.
Within the European Union, equipment into which this product is incorporated must comply with
89/336/EEC, Electromagnetic Compatibility.
2 Safety Information Booklet

Deutsch
1 Wichtige Sicherheitsinformation
Der Frequenzumrichter (nachfolgend Umrichter genannt) wurde für den Einbau in komplette Anlagen
und Systeme entwickelt. Durch unsachgemäße Installierung kann ein Sicherheitsrisiko entstehen. Das
Produkt verwendet hohe Spannungen und Ströme und trägt ein hohes Maß an gespeicherter
elektrischer Energie. Es wird bei der Steuerung von mechanischen Fertigungsanlagen eingesetzt, die
eine potentielle Verletzungsgefahr in sich bergen. Besondere Aufmerksamkeit sollte der elektrischen
Installation und dem Schaltschrankaufbau gelten, um Gefahrenquellen bei normalem Betrieb oder im
Falle einer Betriebsstörung zu umgehen.
Schaltschrankaufbau, Installation, Inbetriebnahme und Wartung sind ausnahmslos durch geschultes
und erfahrenes Personal durchzuführen. Diese Sicherheitsinformation und die Betriebsanleitung sind
von diesem Personenkreis sorgfältig durchzulesen.
1.1 Schaltschrank
Der Umrichter ist für die Montage in einem Schaltschrank vorgesehen, da dieser den Zugang von
ungeschulten und unauthorisierten Personen verhindert und das Eindringen von Schmutz weitgehend
ausschließt. Der Umrichter wurde für Verwendung in einem als
Verschmutzungsgrad 2 gemäß IEC 60664-1 klassifizierten Umfeld entwickelt. Dies bedeutet, daß
ausschließlich trockene, nicht leitfähige Verschmutzung zulässig ist.
1.2 Elektrische Installation

1.2.1 Allgemeine Warnung
Die Spannungen im Gerät können zu schwerwiegenden elektrischen Schocks und/oder Verbrennungen
und zum Tode führen. Äußerste Aufmerksamkeit und Vorsicht ist bei der Arbeit mit dem Umrichter
geboten.
Die Installation muß allen relevanten Sicherheitsbestimmungen des jeweiligen Landes entsprechen.
1.2.2 Trennvorrichtung
Die Netzzuleitung zum Umrichter muß unter Verwendung einer genehmigten Trennvorrichtung
unterbrochen werden, bevor Wartungsarbeiten gleich welcher Art durchgeführt werden, ausgenommen
der im Bedienerhandbuch näher bezeichneten Justierungen der Einstellungen und Parameter. Der
Umrichter verfügt über Kondensatoren im Zwischenkreis, die auch dann noch mit einer potentiell
tödlichen Spannung geladen bleiben, wenn die Stromzufuhr bereits unterbrochen wurde.
Mindestens 10 Minuten sollten zwischen Netzabschaltung der Stromzufuhr und Beginn solcher
Arbeiten liegen, bei denen ein Kontakt mit elektrischen Verbindungen des Umrichters erfolgen könnte.
1.2.3 Produkte mit Steckdosenanschluß
Eine besondere Gefahr kann dann bestehen, wenn der Umrichter in ein Produkt eingebaut wird, das
über einen Steckdosenanschluß an das Netz angeschlossen ist. Bei abgezogenem Stecker liegen die
Steckerkontakte über die Gleichrichterdioden auf lebensgefährlich hohem Potential. Sollten diese
Steckerstifte leicht zugänglich sein, muß eine Möglichkeit gefunden werden, durch die der Stecker
automatisch vom Umrichter isoliert wird – wie z.B. durch ein Sperr-Relais, um jede Möglichkeit eines
Elektroschocks durch Berührung mit den Steckerstiften zu vermeiden.
1.2.4 STOP-Funktion
Die elektronische Stop-Funktion im Umrichter entfernt keine gefährliche Spannungen aus dem
Umrichter oder aus externen Einheiten, noch trennt es den Motor von gefährlichen Spannungen. Auch
bei gesperrtem Antrieb liegen die Umrichterausgangsklemmen über die IGBT´s bzw. deren antiparallel
geschalteten Dioden auf lebensgefährlich hohem Potential.
1.2.5 Erdung (Erdverbindung, isoelektrische Verbindung)
Außer im Fall vollisolierter Produkte, die nicht mit einer Verbindung zur Erde versehen sind, muß die
Erdung des Umrichters mit einem elektrischen Leiter erfolgen, der den voraussichtlichen Fehlerstrom
im Falle einer Störung tragen kann. Die im Handbuch aufgeführten Erdverbindungen sind zu befolgen.

3
1.2.6 Sicherungen
Unter Berücksichtigung der Anweisungen in der Betriebsanleitung ist die Netzzuleitung mit
Sicherungen zu versehen. Bei Nichtbeachtung könnte Feuergefahr bestehen.
1.2.7 Überstrom-Schutz
Der Umrichter besitzt Einrichtungen zur Begrenzung des Motorstroms und zur Abschaltung bei
Motorüberlastung. Diese Funktionen sind korrekt einzustellen, um im Falle einer mechanischen
Überlast oder einer elektrischen Störung das Risiko einer Motorüberhitzung einzudämmen.
1.2.8 Trennung der Steuerkreise
Die Steuerkreise sind vom Stromkreislauf des Umrichters durch Quasipotentialtrennung getrennt. Der
Installateur hat sicherzustellen, daß die externen Steuereinheiten durch mindestens eine zur
Verwendung bei Wechselstrom-Versorgung genehmigte Isolationsschicht gegen Berührung isoliert
sind. Wenn die Steuerkreise mit anderen Kreisläufen als solche, die als Sicherheits-Kleinspannung
klassifiziert sind, angeschlossen werden – z.B. an einen Personalcomputer – dann ist eine
zusätzliche Isolationsbarriere einzufügen, damit die Klassifizierung als Sicherheits-Kleinspannung
aufrechterhalten wird.
1.2.9 Trennung der Steuerkreise – Cheetah, Puma
Die Steuerkreise dieser Umrichter sind nicht von den Stromkreisläufen getrennt. Sie sind in
jeder Hinsicht als potentiell wechselstromführend zu behandeln.
1.2.10 Trennung der Steuerkreise – Maestro-Servo-Umrichter
Die Steuerkreise dieser Umrichter sind nicht von den Stromkreisläufen getrennt. In den meisten
Anwendungen wird ein Trenntrafo zur Versorgung des Umrichters benutzt. Der Negativpol des
Gleichstromkreislaufs im Umrichter ist geerdet. Wenn die Erdverbindung ausreicht, um den
voraussichtlichen Fehlerstrom der Zufuhr zu tragen, dann können die Steuerkreise sicher mit anderen
geerdeten Kreisen verbunden werden. Wenn der Negativpol des Gleichstroms nicht mit der Erde
verbunden ist, sind die Steuerkreise als potentiell wechselstromführend zu behandeln.
1.2.11 Bremswiderstand (wo anwendbar)
Die in der Betriebsanleitung beschriebenen Vorsichtsmaßnahmen für Bremswiderstände (z.B.
Anschluß, Überlastschutz) sind zu berücksichtigen.
1.3 Einrichtung, Inbetriebnahme und Wartung

Es ist von größter Wichtigkeit, daß Änderungen der Umrichtereinstellungen gründlich durchdacht
werden. Je nach Anwendung kann eine Veränderung Auswirkungen auf die Sicherheit haben. Es sind
Sicherheitsvorkehrungen gegen unbeabsichtigte Veränderungen oder Manipulationen zu ergreifen.
Einige spezielle Einstellungen, die besonderer Aufmerksamkeit bedürfen, sind unten aufgeführt. Diese
Liste erhebt keinen Anspruch auf Vollständigkeit; es mag weitere Einstellungen geben, die einen
Einfluß auf die Sicherheit in speziellen Anwendungen haben.
Automatischer Wiederanlauf nach Netzausfall: In diesem Modus kann der Umrichter unerwartet
starten.
Reset Störungsparameter: Je nach Anwendung kann es hier zu Gefährdung durch
unvorhergesehene Betriebsaufnahme kommen.
Motor-Parameter: Bei schwerwiegenden Einstellungsfehlern können Überhitzung und mögliches
Brandrisiko resultieren.
Bitte versuchen Sie nicht, Reparaturen innerhalb des Gerätes selbst durchzuführen. Schicken Sie
einen fehlerhaften Umrichter zur Reparatur an den Hersteller zurück.

1.4 Sicherheit von Maschinen und sicherheitskritische
Anwendungen
Innerhalb der Europäischen Union müssen alle Maschinen der Weisung 97/37/EC über die Sicherheit
von Maschinen entsprechen.
Hard- und Software des Umrichters wurden nach hohen Standards entwickelt und getestet, ein
Versagen ist sehr unwahrscheinlich. Wie hoch auch immer das Niveau der Umrichter-Steuerfunktionen
ist – zum Beispiel Stop/Start, Vorwärts/Rückwärts und Maximalgeschwindigkeit – ohne zusätzliche,
unabhängige Sicherungseinrichtungen kann dies für sicherheitskritische Anwendungen nicht
ausreichen.
Für alle Anwendungen, bei denen Störungen Verletzungen oder Verlust von Menschenleben zur Folge
haben könnten, muß eine Risikoeinschätzung durchgeführt werden, damit, wo erforderlich, weitere
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen ergriffen werden können.
1.5 Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit (EMV)

Das Produkt wurde nach den neuesten EMV-Standards entwickelt und Daten dazu sind aus dem EMV-
Datenblatt zu entnehmen. Unter extremen Bedingungen kann die Funktion des Produktes durch
elektromagnetische Interaktion mit anderen Anlagen beeinträchtigt werden oder diese selbst
hervorrufen. Es liegt in der Verantwortung des Monteurs, sicherzustellen, daß die Anlage oder das
System, in welches das Produkt eingebaut werden soll, mit den relevanten EMV-Richtlinien des
jeweiligen Landes übereinstimmen.
Innerhalb der Europäischen Union müssen Anlagen, in die dieses Produkt eingebaut werden soll, den
Richtlinien 89/336/EEC über Elektromagnetische Kompatibilität entsprechen.

Français
1 Informations de sécurité Importantes
Ce variateur de vitesse (variateur) a été conçu pour être incorporé dans des équipements ou systèmes
complets. Sa mauvaise installation pourra entraîner des risques pour la sécurité. Outre qu’elle fasse
appel à des tensions et des courants élevés et contienne un haut niveau d’énergie électrique
emmagasinée, cette unité est utilisée pour commander des installations mécaniques dangereuses. On
accordera donc une attention particulière à l’installation électrique et à la conception du système afin de
prévenir tout risque en mode de fonctionnement normal ou en cas de dysfonctionnement de
l’équipement. La conception du système, son installation, sa mise en service et sa maintenance
devront être confiées à du personnel suffisamment formé et expérimenté. Ceui-ci devra
lire attentivement les informations de sécurité ainsi que le manuel d’instruction.
1.1 Armoire
Le variateur est étudié pour être monté dans une armoire qui en limite l’accès au personnel formé et
autorisé et protège l’unité contre la pénétration d’éléments contaminants. Il est conçu pour fonctionner
dans un environnement de pollution de type 2 selon la norme IEC 60664-1. Cela signifie que seule une
contamination sèche et non-conductrice est acceptable.
1.2 Installation électrique

1.2.1 Avertissement général
Les tensions utilisées dans ce variateur peuvent provoquer des décharges électriques sévères et/ou
des brûlures pouvant entraîner la mort. Procéder en toutes circonstances avec le plus grand soin
lorsque l’on travaille sur ou à proximité de cette unité. L’installation doit satisfaire à toutes les
réglementations de sécurité en vigueur dans le pays d’utilisation.
1.2.2 Dispositif d’isolement
L’alimentation AC doit être éliminée du variateur à l’aide d’un dispositif d’isolement approuvé avant de
procéder à toute intervention d’entretien autre que l’ajustement des réglages ou des paramètres
spécifiés dans le manuel. Le variateur contient des condensateurs qui restent chargés à une tension
potentiellement mortelle même après suppression de l’alimentation. Attendre au moins 10 minutes
après la suppression de l’alimentation avant d’effectuer toute intervention pouvant entraîner un contact
avec les connections électriques du variateur.
1.2.3 Connection par le biais d’une prise
Un variateur incorporé à une unité reliée à l’alimentation par le biais d’une prise présente des risques
spécifiques. Même lorsque la prise est débranchée, les fiches peuvent être connectées à l’entrée du
variateur qui n’est séparée de la charge emmagasinée dans le condensateur que par des dispositifs à
semi-conducteurs. Pour prévenir toute décharge électrique à travers les fiches, lorsqu’elles sont
accessibles, on s’assurera que la prise est automatiquement isolée du variateur, au moyen par
exemple d’un contacteur de verrouillage.
1.2.4 Fonction d’ARRET
La fonction d’arrêt du variateur n’élimine pas les tensions dangereuses du variateur ou de toute unité
optionnelle externe. Elle n’isole pas non plus le moteur des tensions dangereuses.
1.2.5 Mise à la masse (mise à la terre, liaison équipotentielle)
A l’exception des unités entièrement isolées qui ne comportent pas de prise de terre, le variateur doit
être mis à la terre par un conducteur capable d’acheminer le courant de défaut potentiel en cas de
défaut. Les prises de terre indiquées dans ce manuel doivent être respectées.
1.2.6 Fusibles
Des fusibles ou une protection contre les surintensités de courant doivent être fournis à l’entrée
conformément aux instructions du manuel.
Le non-respect absolu de ces instructions pourra entraîner un risque d’incendie.

Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 www.controltechniques.com Issue Number: 5
1.2.7 Protection contre les surintensités de courant
Le variateur intègre des dispositifs conçus pour limiter le courant du moteur et pour supprimer
l’alimentation en cas de température du moteur excessive. Ces fonctions doivent être correctement
réglées afin de prévenir toute surchauffe du moteur en cas de surcharge mécanique ou de panne
électrique.
1.2.8 Isolement des circuits de commande
Les circuits de commande ne sont isolés des circuits de puissance du variateur que par une isolation
de base. L’installateur s’assurera que les circuits de commande externes soient isolés de tout contact
humain par au moins une couche isolante conçue pour être utilisée à la tension d’alimentation AC
voulue. Si les circuits de commandes doivent être connectés à d’autres circuits de type SELV (tension
extra basse de sécurité) tels qu’un ordinateur personnel, une barrière d’isolement supplémentaire
devra être prévue afin de maintenir cette classification SELV.
1.2.9 Isolement des circuits de commande – Modèles Cheetah, Puma
Les circuits de commande de ces variateurs ne sont pas isolés des circuits de puissance.
Ils doivent être considérés comme étant sous tension au potentiel de l’alimentation AC.
1.2.10 Isolement des circuits de commande – Gammes Maestro et servo
variateurs
Les circuits de commande des ces variateurs ne sont pas isolés des circuits de puissance. Dans
la plupart des applications, un transformateur d’isolement est utilisé pour assurer l’alimentation du
variateur et la borne négative du circuit de puissance DC du variateur est mise à la terre. Tant que la
prise de terre est suffisante pour acheminer le courant de défaut potentiel, les circuits de commande
pourront être connectés en toute sécurité aux autres circuits mis à la terre. Si la borne DC négative
n’est pas mise à la terre, les circuits de commande devront être considérés comme étant sous
tension au potentiel de l’alimentation AC.
1.2.11 Résistances de freinage (selon modèles)
Les précautions décrites dans le manuel d’instructions pour les résistances de freinage sont
essentielles pour prévenir les risques d’incendie en cas d’énergie de freinage particulièrement élevée
ou de perte de contrôle du circuit de freinage.
1.3 Configuration, mise en service et maintenance

Il est essentiel de considérer avec soin toute modification des paramètres du variateur. Une
modification peut affecter la sécurité en fonction des applications. Des précautions appropriées devront
être prises contre toute modification accidentelle ou non autorisée des paramètres.
On trouvera ci-dessous une liste de réglages spécifiques exigeant une attention particulière.
Cette liste n’est pas exhaustive dans la mesure où d’autres réglages pourront affecter la sécurité de
certaines applications spécifiques.
Démarrage automatique Le variateur pourra démarrer soudainement dans ce mode.
Rétablissement des paramètres par défaut Suivant les applications, ceci peut entraîner un
fonctionnement imprévisible ou dangereux.
Paramètres du moteur Un mauvais réglage des paramètres peut entraîner une surchauffe et un
risque d’incendie.
Ne tentez pas d’effectuer des réparations internes. Retournez l’appareil au fournisseur pour réparation.

1.4 Sécurité des machines, et applications de sécurité
critique
Au sein de l’Union Européenne, toutes les machines dans lesquelles ce produit sera utilisé devront être
conformes à la Directive 97/37/EC, sur la Sécurité des Machines.
Le matériel et le logiciel du variateur sont conçus et testés selon des normes élevées et toute panne est
fortement improbable. Cependant, le niveau d’intégrité offert par les fonctions de commande du
variateur (par ex. marche/arrêt, marche avant/arrière et vitesse maximum) ne suffit pas pour
assurer son utilisation dans des applications de sécurité critique sans dispositifs de protection
indépendants supplémentaires. Toutes les applications dont le dysfonctionnement pourrait entraîner
des blessures ou la mort doivent faire l’objet d’une évaluation des risques et les protections
supplémentaires nécessaires doivent être mises en place.
1.5 Compatibilité électromagnétique (CEM)

Ce produit est conforme à des normes CEM élevées et ses caractéristiques sont fournies dans la fiche
CEM. En cas de conditions extrêmes, le produit pourra causer ou souffrir de dérangements dus à une
interaction électromagnétique avec d’autres équipements. Il appartient à l’installateur de s’assurer que
l’équipement ou le système dans lequel le produit est incorporé, est conforme aux réglementations
CEM en vigueur dans le pays d’’utilisation.
Au sein de l’Union Européenne, tout équipement dans lequel ce produit sera incorporé devra être
conforme à la directive 89/336/EEC sur la compatibilité électromagnétique.

Italiano
1 Informazioni importanti per la sicurezza
Questo prodotto (convertitore) é inteso ad essere incorporato da personale specializzato in
apparecchiature o sistemi completi. Se installato in modo sbagliato puó presentare rischi per la
sicurezza. Questo prodotto é sottoposto ad alte tensioni e correnti, ha un alto livello di energia
immagazzinata, ed é usato per controllare impianti meccanici che possono causare ferite. Richiede
molta attenzione nell'installazione elettrica e nella progettazione del sistema per evitare pericoli durante
il normale funzionamento e nell'eventualitá di un cattivo funzionamento delle attrezzature. La
progettazione, l'installazione, la messa in opera e la manutenzione del sistema devono essere fatte da
personale che abbia l'addestramento e l'esperienza necessari. Tale personale deve leggere con
attenzione queste informazioni per la sicurezza ed il manuale d'istruzioni.
1.1 Contenitore
Il convertitore é inteso ad essere montato in un contenitore che impedisca l'accesso da parte di
personale che non sia addestrato e autorizzato e che impedisca l'ingresso di agenti contaminanti. É
progettato per l'uso in un ambiente classificato con grado di inquinamento 2 in conformitá alla
normativa IEC 60664-1. Ció significa che solo una contaminante asciutto e non conduttivo é ammesso.
1.2 Installazione elettrica

1.2.1 Avvertimento generale
Le tensioni usate in questa unitá possono dare una forte scossa elettrica e/o bruciature e possono
essere letali. É necessario fare estrema attenzione in qualsiasi momento mentre si lavora con questa
unitá o accanto ad essa.
L'installazione deve essere in conformitá dell'intera legislazione pertinente del paese in cui viene usata.
1.2.2 Dispositivo d'isolamento
L'alimentazione in corrente alternata deve essere staccata dal convertitore usando un appropriato
dispositivo d'isolamento prima che venga effettuato qualsiasi lavoro di manutenzione, salvo che per le
registrazioni delle regolazioni e dei parametri specificati nel manuale. Il convertitore contiene dei
condensatori che rimangono caricati ad una tensione potenzialmente letale dopo che l'alimentazione é
stata staccata. Attendere almeno 10 minuti dopo aver tolto tensione prima di effettuare qualsiasi lavoro
che possa richiedere contatto con i collegamenti elettrici del convertitore.
1.2.3 Prodotti collegati a mezzo di spina e presa di corrente
Un pericolo particolare puó esistere quando il convertitore é utilizzato in un equipaggiamento collegato
alla rete di alimentazione a mezzo di spina e presa di corrente. Quando staccata, nel caso in cui la
spina sia direttamente collegata al convertitore, Ì isolamento dalla carica immagazzinata nei
condensatori di filtro dai terminali della spina é affidata solamente a dispositivi elettronici a
semiconduttore. Per evitare ogni possibilitá di scossa elettrica derivante dai terminali della spina
occorre che vengano installati dispositivi per isolare automaticamnte la spina dal convertitore, per es un
contattore ad autoritenuta.
1.2.4 Funzione di Arresto
La funzione di arresto del convertitore non elimina le tensioni pericolose nel convertitore o in ogni unitá
opzionale esterna, né isola il motore dallÌalta tensione.
1.2.5 Messa a terra (messa a massa, collegamento equipotenziale)
Eccetto che per i prodotti completamente isolati dove non viene previsto collegamento a terra, il
convertitore deve essere messo a terra a mezzo di un conduttore sufficiente a supportare la probabile
corrente di fuga verso terra nell'eventualitá di un guasto. I collegamenti di terra indicati nel manuale
devono venire scrupolosamente osservati.

1.2.6 Fusibili
Si devono provvedere fusibili o protezione contro sovracorrente sulÌalimentazione dei convertitori in
conformitá con le instruzioni nel manuale. La mancata stretta ossrvanza delle instruzioni puó causare
rischio d'incendio.
1.2.7 Protezione contro sovracorrente
Il convertitore è provvisto di regolazioni per limitare la corrente motore e per staccarne l'alimentazione
nell'eventualitá di sovratemperatura. Queste regolazioni devono essere impostate correttamente per
evitare il pericolo che il motore si surriscaldi nell'eventualitá di sovraccarico meccanico o di guasto
elettrico.
1.2.8 Isolamento dei circuiti di controllo
I circuiti di controllo sono isolati dai circuiti di potenza. L'installatore deve accertarsi che i circuiti di
controllo esterni siano isolati contro il contatto umano da almeno un ulteriore livello di isolamento
dimensionato per la tensione di alimentazione prevista, (isolamento galvanico oppure protezioni da
contatto fisico). Se i circuiti di controllo sono del tipo classificato come Safety Extra Low Voltage,(SELV)
- per esempio un personal computer (PC) bisogna prevedere Ì isolamento galvanico in modo da
mantenere la classifica SELV
1.2.9 Isolamento dei circuiti di controllo Cheetah, Puma
I circuiti di controllo di questi convertitori non sono isolati dai circuiti di potenza. Essi devono
venire trattati sotto ogni aspetto come se sottoposti alla tensione della rete di alimentazione in
corrente alternata.
1.2.10 Isolamento dei circuiti di controllo - Gamma di servoconvertitori
Maestro
I circuiti di controllo di questi convertitori non sono isolati dai circuiti di potenza. In tutte le
applicazioni viene usato un transformatore galvanicamente isolato per alimentare il convertitore, ed il
morsetto negativo del circuito di potenza in corrente continua del convertitore (-DCbus) deve essere
collegato a terra. Il collegamento di terra deve essere dimensionato adeguatamente per sopportare la
possibile corrente di fuga verso terra, I circuiti di controllo possono venire collegati senza pericolo ad
altri circuiti esterni collegati a terra. Se il morsetto negativo della corrente continua non é collegato
a terra, allora i circuiti di controllo devono essere trattati sotto ogni aspetto come se sottoposti
alla tensione della rete di alimentazione in corrente alternata.
1.2.11 Resistenza di frenatura (ove applicabile)
Le precauzioni descritte nel manuale d'istruzioni per le resistenze di frenatura sono essenziali per
evitare il rischio d'incendio nell'eventualitá di una inaspettata alta energia di rigenerazione o di
eventuale guasto elettrico del circuito di frenatura.
1.3 Messa a punto, messa in opera e manutenzione

É essenziale che le variazioni delle regolazioni dei convertitori vengano attentamente considerate.In
funzione dell'applicazione queste regolazioni possono avere un impatto diretto sulla sicurezza, perciò
devono essere prese precauzioni particolari contro errate manipolazioni. Alcune regolazioni specifiche
che richiedono una cura particolare sono elencate qui di seguito, questa però non é una lista completa,
altre regolazoni possono pregiudicare la sicurezza in applicazioni specifiche.
Avviamento automatico: Il convertitore puó partire inaspettatamente in questo modo operativo di
funzionamento.
Ripristino dei parametri di default: A seconda dell'applicazione, ció puó causare un funzionamento
imprevedibile o rischioso.
Parameti del motore: Regolazioni completamente sbagliate possono provocare eccessivi
surriscaldamenti con possibile rischio d'incendio. Non tentare la riparazione del convertitore. Spedire il
convertitore al fornitore per la riparazione.

1.4 Sicurezza del macchinario, e applicazioni critiche dal
punto di vista sicurezza
Entro l'Unione Europea, tuti i macchinari in cui viene usato questo prodotto devono soddisfare la
Direttiva 97/37/EC, sulla Sicurezza dei macchinari. I circuiti hardware ed il sofware dei convertitori sono
studiati e collaudati secondo criteri rigidi, ed eventuali guasti sono molto improbabili. Peró il livello
d'integritá offerto dalle funzioni di controllo dei convertitori - per esempio avviamento/arresto, avanti/
indietro e velocitá massima - non é sufficiente per l'uso in applicazioni critiche dal punto di vista della
sicurezza senza ulteriori sistemi di protezione addizionali e indipendenti. Tutte le applicazioni dove un
cattivo funzionamento potrebbe causare ferite o morte devono essere soggetti ad una attenta
valutazione dei rischi, e ulteriori livelli di protezione devono essere previsti ove necessario.
1.5 Compatibilita' elettromagnetica (EMC)

Questo prodotto é progettato secondo criteri rigidi di compatibilitá eletrromagnetica (EMC), ed i dati
relativi vengono forniti nel foglio dati sull'EMC. In condizioni estreme questo prodotto puó causare o
soffrire di disturbi dovuti a interazione elettromagnetica con altre apparecchiature.
L'installatore ha la responsabilitá di assicurare che l'apparecchiatura o sistema nel quale questo
prodotto viene incorporato sia in conforme alla legislazione sull'EMC del paese in cui viene usato. Entro
l'Uniione Europea, le attrezzature in cui é incorporato qusto prodotto devono soddisfare la Direttiva 89/
336/EEC, sulla Compatibilitá Elettromagnetica.

Español
1 Información Importante de Seguridad
Este Accionamiento de velocidad variable tiene por objeto su incorporación profesional a equipos ó
sistemas completos. Si se instala incorrectamente, puede entrañar riesgos de seguridad. El producto
emplea tensiones y corrientes altas, comporta un alto nivel de condensación de energía eléctrica, y es
empleado para controlar maquinaria mecánica capaz de causar daños personales. Es necesario
prestar gran atención a la instalación eléctrica y al diseño del sistema para evitar riesgos, ya en la
operación normal ó en el caso de averías en los equipos. El diseño del sistema, la instalación, puesta
en servicio y mantenimiento deben ser realizados por personal que posee la experiencia y formación
necesarias. Deben leer esta información de seguridad y el manual de instrucción con mucho cuidado.
1.1 El Armario
El Accionamiento tiene por objeto ser montado en un armario ó cerramiento capaz de impedir el
acceso salvo al personal formado y autorizado, y que impide la entrada de materias contaminantes.
Está diseñado para su empleo en un entorno clasificado con el grado 2 de contaminación en
conformidad con la norma IEC 60664-1. Esto significa que solo es aceptable la contaminación seca y
no conductiva.
1.2 Instalación Eléctrica

1.2.1 Aviso general
Las tensiones empleadas en la unidad pueden causar sacudida eléctrica violenta y/o quemaduras, y
pueden resultar fatales. Es necesario ejercer mucho cuidado en todo momento cuando se trabaja con
la unidad ó en sus alrededores.
La instalación debe cumplir todas las normas y disposiciones legales vigentes en el país de uso.
1.2.2 Dispositivo de aislamiento
Antes de realizar ninguna tarea de servicio en el Accionamiento, salvo los ajustes de configuración ó
parámetros especificados en el manual, el suministro de corriente alterna debe ser desconectado,
empleando un dispositivo de aislamiento homologado. Una vez desconectado el suministro eléctrico, el
Accionamiento contiene condensadores que permanecen cargados con una tensión potencialmente
fatal. Una vez que el suministro ha sido desconectado, y antes de realizar trabajos que comprenden
contacto con conexiones eléctricas del Accionamiento, se deben dejar pasar por lo menos 10 minutos.
1.2.3 Productos conectados con enchufes macho y hembra
Un peligro especial puede existir cuando el Accionamiento es incorporado a un producto conectado al
suministro eléctrico mediante enchufes macho y hembra. Cuando está desconectado, las clavijas del
enchufe pueden ser conectadas a la entrada del Accionamiento, la cual está aislada de la carga que
permanece en el condensador solo por dispositivos semiconductores. Para evitar la posibilidad de un
choque eléctrico con las clavijas si estas son accesibles, se deben proveer los medios necesarios para
el aislamiento automático del enchufe y el Accionamiento, por ejemplo mediante un interruptor de
bloqueo ó enclavamiento.
1.2.4 Función STOP
La función STOP provista en el Accionamiento no elimina las tensiones peligrosas en él ó en cualquier
unidad opcional externa, ni tampoco aisla el motor de las tensiones peligrosas.
1.2.5 Conexión a Tierra (masa, conexión equipotencial)
Salvo en productos con aislamiento inherente completo no dotados de conexión a tierra, el
Accionamiento tiene que estar provisto por una conexión a tierra cuyo cable es capaz de conducir la
corriente de fallo en caso de un fallo. Las conexiones a tierra descritas en el manual deben ser
seguidas por entero.

1.2.6 Fusibles
Los fusibles ó la protección adecuada para sobrecargas de corriente deben ser provistos en la entrada,
en conformidad con las instrucciones en el manual. El incumplimiento de las instrucciones completas
puede dar lugar a riesgos de incendios.
1.2.7 Protección contra sobrecargas
El Accionamiento tiene prestaciones para limitar la corriente del motor, y para desconectar el
suministro en caso de temperatura excesiva del motor. Estas funciones deben ser definidas
correctamente para evitar el riesgo de calentamiento excesivo del motor en casos de sobrecarga
mecánica ó avería eléctrica.
1.2.8 Aislamiento de los circuitos de control
Los circuitos de control están aislados de los circuitos de potencia eléctrica en el Accionamiento solo
mediante aislamientos ordinarios. El instalador tiene la obligación de asegurar que los circuitos de
control externo están aislados del contacto humano por lo menos con una capa de aislamiento
homologada para su empleo con suministros eléctricos de corriente alterna. Si los circuitos de control
van a ser conectados a otros circuitos clasificados de Muy Bajas Tensiones de Seguridad (SELV), por
ejemplo para un ordenador personal, se debe instalar una barrera adicional de aislamiento para así
poder mantener la clasificación SELV.
1.2.9 Aislamiento de circuitos de control: Cheetah, Puma
Los circuitos de control de estos Accionamientos no están aislados de sus circuitos de
potencia eléctrica. Deben ser tratados en todos los casos como si tuvieran corriente potencial
de suministro alterno.
1.2.10 Aislamiento de circuitos de control: Gama Maestro de
Servomotores Accionamiento
Los circuitos de control de estos Accionamientos no están aislados de sus circuitos de
potencia eléctrica. En la mayoríade las aplicaciones, para alimentar el Accionamiento se emplea un
transformador aislante, y la borna negativa del circuito de potencia cc del Accionamiento está
conectada a tierra. Mientras la conexión a tierra sea adecuada para conducir la corriente de fallo del
suministro, los circuitos de control pueden ser conectados con seguridad a los otros circuitos
conectados a tierra. Si la borna negativa de cc no está conectada a tierra, entonces los circuitos
de control deben ser tratados como si tuvieran corriente potencial de suministro alterno.
1.2.11 Resistencias de frenado (cuando proceden)
Las precauciones descritas en el manual de instrucción respecto a resistencias de frenado son
esenciales para evitar el riesgo de incendios en situaciones de alta energía inesperada de frenado ó
pérdida de control en el circuito de frenado.
1.3 Configuración, puesta en servicio y mantenimiento

Es esencial considerar con cuidado los cambios a las configuraciones del Accionamiento.
Dependiendo de la aplicación, un cambio puede tener un impacto sobre la seguridad. Deben ser
tomadas las precauciones oportunas para impedir los cambios inadvertidos ó la manipulación
indebida.
Abajo señalamos algunas configuraciones específicas que requieren atención especial. Esta no es una
lista exclusiva, ya que otras configuraciones pueden ejercer un impacto sobre la seguridad en
aplicaciones específicas.
Arranque automático El Accionamiento puede arrancar inesperadamente en esta configuración.
Restaurar parámetros por defecto Dependiendo de la aplicación, esto puede causar la operación
imprevista ó peligrosa.
Parámetros del motor Los ajustes incorrectos de configuración pueden provocar el sobrecalentado
del motor ó el riesgo de incendios.
No intente proceder a reparaciones internas. Devuelva el equipo dañado al proveedor para su
reparación.

1.4 La Seguridad de la Maquinaria, y aplicaciones de
seguridad crítica
Dentro de la Unión Europea, toda la maquinaria empleada con el producto debe cumplir con la
Directiva 97/37/EC, Seguridad de la Maquinaria.
Los equipos físico y lógico del Accionamiento están diseñados y probados a un nivel muy alto, y las
averías son muy improbables. No obstante, el nivel de integridad ofrecido por las funciones de control
del Accionamiento, por ejemplo stop/arranque, adelante/atrás y velocidad máxima, no es suficiente
para su empleo en aplicaciones de seguridad crítica sin canales adicionales independientes de
protección.
Todas las aplicaciones en las que las averías comportan riesgos de salud y seguridad a la vida
humana deben ser sometidas a una evaluación de riesgos, y la instalación de protección adicional
cuando proceda.
1.5 Compatibilidad Electromagnética (CEM)

El producto está diseñado con altos niveles de protección electromagnética, y los datos pertinentes
están provistos en la ficha de datos CEM. En condiciones extremas, el producto puede causar ó
experimentar trastornos debido al intercambio de actividad electromagnética con otros equipos. Es la
responsabilidad del instalador asegurar que el equipo ó sistema donde está incorporado el producto
cumple con la legislación correspondiente respecto a CEM en el país de uso.
Dentro de la Unión Europea, los equipos que llevan incorporado este producto tienen obligación de
cumplir con la norma 89/336/EEC, Compatibilidad Electromagnética.

Svenska
1 Viktig säkerhetsinformation
Denna produkt för hastighetsreglering (i fortsättningen kallad drivprodukt) är avsedd att på ett
professionellt sätt införlivas i kompletta utrustningar eller system. Om den installeras på ett felaktigt sätt
kan detta medföra säkerhetsrisker. Produkten utnyttjar höga spänningar och strömstyrkor, innehåller en
stor mängd lagrad elektrisk energi och används för att reglera mekaniska anläggningar som kan
framkalla personskador. Särskild uppmärksamhet måste iakttas beträffande den elektriska
installationen och systemets konstruktion för att undvika risker som uppträder antingen vid normal drift
eller i händelse av felfunktion hos utrustningen. Konstruktion, installation, idrifttagning och underhåll av
systemet måste utföras av personal med tillfredsställande utbildning och erfarenhet. Dessa måste
noggrant läsa igenom denna säkerhetsinformation och instruktionshandboken.
1.1 Kapsling
Drivprodukten är avsedd att monteras i en kapsling eller ett apparatskåp som förhindrar åtkomst av
andra än av utbildad och auktoriserad personal och som skyddar den mot föroreningar. Den är
konstruerad för användning i en miljö som klassas som föroreningsklass 2 enligt IEC 60664-1. Detta
innebär att endast torra, icke ledande föroreningar får förekomma.
1.2 Elektrisk installation

1.2.1 Allmän varning
De spänningar som utnyttjas i enheten kan framkalla svår elektrisk chock och/eller brännskada, och
kan vara dödliga. Iakttag största försiktighet under allt arbete med enheten eller i dess närhet.
Installationen måste överensstämma med all relevant säkerhetslagstiftning i det land där den skall
användas.
1.2.2 Frånskiljningsanordning
Nätanslutningen till drivprodukten måste brytas med hjälp av en godkänd brytare eller frånskiljare innan
något service-arbete utföres, utöver de justeringar av inställningar eller parametrar som anges i
handboken. Drivprodukten innehåller kondensatorer som förblir uppladdade till en potentiellt dödlig
spänning efter det att nätanslutningen har brutits. Låt det gå minst 10 min från det att anslutningen
brutits innan något arbete påbörjas som kan innebära kontakt med drivproduktens elektriska
anslutningar.
1.2.3 Produkter anslutna med stickkontakt
En speciell risk föreligger om drivprodukten ingår i en produkt som ansluts till nätet med en stickkontakt.
När kontakten är urdragen kan stickkontaktens stift ha förbindelse med drivproduktens ingång, vilken
endast avskiljes från kondensatorns upplagrade laddning av halvledarkomponenter. För att eliminera
all risk för en elektrisk chock från stiften, om dessa är åtkomliga, måste man förse utrustningen med en
anordning så att stickkontakten automatiskt frånskiljes från drivprodukten – exempelvis via en förreglad
kontaktor.
1.2.4 STOPP-funktionen
Drivproduktens STOPP-funktion eller STOPP-knapp kopplar ej bort de farliga spänningarna från
drivprodukten eller från någon extern extraenhet och skiljer ej heller ifrån motorn från farliga
spänningar.
1.2.5 Jordning (jordanslutning, ekvipotentiell anslutning)
Med undantag för fullständigt isolerade produkter, där ingen jordanslutning finnes, måste drivprodukten
vara jordad med en ledare som är tillräcklig för att kunna bära den felström som kan förutses uppträda
om ett fel skulle inträffa. De jordanslutningar som visas i handboken måste följas.
1.2.6 Säkringar
Drivprodukten måste förses med säkringar eller momentant överströmsskydd på nätsidan enligt
instruktionerna i handboken. Om dessa anvisningar inte följes noggrant kan detta medföra brandrisk.

Issue Number: 5 www.controltechniques.com Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1
1.2.7 Överströmsskydd
Drivprodukten är försedd med inbyggt skydd för att begränsa motorströmmen och för att koppla bort
nätspänningen om motorn blir alltför varm. Dessa funktioner måste ställas in korrekt för att man skall
undgå risken att motorn överhettas i händelse av en mekanisk överbelastning eller ett elektriskt fel.
1.2.8 Isolering av reglerkretsarna
Reglerkretsarna är isolerade från starkströmskretsarna i drivprodukten med endast en grundisolering.
Installatören måste kontrollera att de externa reglerkretsarna är isolerade från kontakt med människor
genom minst ett skikt av isolering som är dimensionerat för användning vid växelströmsnätets
matningsspänning. Om reglerkretsarna skall anslutas till andra kretsar som klassificeras såsom
Säkerhetssvagström (SELV) – exempelvis till en persondator – krävs ytterligare en isoleringsbarriär för
att SELV-kraven skall uppfyllas.
1.2.9 Isolering av reglerkretsarna i strömriktarna Cheetah, Puma
Reglerkretsarna i dessa drivprodukter är ej isolerade från starkströmskretsarna. De måste i alla
avseenden behandlas såsom strömförande med det matande växelströmsnätets potential.
1.2.10 Isolering av reglerkretsarna i servona i Maestro-serien
Reglerkretsarna i dessa drivprodukter är ej isolerade från starkströmskretsarna. I de flesta
tillämpningar används en isolerande transformator för att försörja drivprodukten, och den negativa
polen i drivproduktens starkströms-likströmskrets är förbunden med jord. Under förutsättning att
jordförbindelsen är tillräcklig för att kunna bära den felström som kan förutses uppträda från
spänningsmatningen, kan reglerkretsarna på ett säkert sätt anslutas till andra jordade kretsar. Om den
negativa likströmspolen ej är förbunden med jord, måste reglerkretsarna behandlas såsom
strömförande med det matande växelströmsnätets potential.
1.2.11 Bromsmotstånd (i tillämpliga fall)
Det är nödvändigt att följa de försiktighetsåtgärder som beskrivs i instruktionshandboken för
bromsmotstånden för att undvika brandrisk i händelse av en oväntat hög bromsenergi eller förlorad
kontroll över bromskretsen.
1.3 Installation, idrifttagande och underhåll

Eventuella ändringar i drivproduktens inställningar måste övervägas noga. Beroende på tillämpningen
kan en sådan ändring få stor betydelse för säkerheten. Lämpliga försiktighetsåtgärder måste vidtagas
för att förhindra oavsiktliga eller otillåtna omställningar.
Här nedan anges vissa specifika inställningar som kräver särskild försiktighet. Denna lista är på intet
sätt fullständig; andra inställningar kan påverka säkerheten i specifika tillämpningar.
Automatisk start I detta läge kan drivprodukten starta oväntat.
Återställ parametrar till standardläge Beroende på tillämpning kan detta orsaka oförutsägbart eller
riskabelt uppförande vid drift.
Motorparametrar Allvarliga felinställningar kan leda till överhettning och eventuell brandrisk. Försök
inte utföra interna reparationer. Returnera felaktig produkt till leverantören för reparation.
1.4 Säkerhet hos maskiner, samt säkerhetskritiska

tillämpningar
Inom Europeiska Unionen måste alla maskiner vari denna produkt används uppfylla direktivet 97/37/
EC, Säkerhet hos maskiner.
Drivproduktens hårdvara och mjukvara är konstruerade och utprovade efter höga krav, och
funktionsavbrott är mycket osannolika. Emellertid är den integritetsnivå som tillhandahålles av
drivproduktens manöverfunktioner – exempelvis stopp/start, framåt/bakåt och max-hastighet – ej
tillräckliga för säkerhetskritiska tillämpningar utan ytterligare, oberoende säkerhetsanordningar. Alla
tillämpningar där felfunktion skulle kunna orsaka skada eller förlust av människoliv måste underkastas
en riskbedömning, och extra skyddsarrangemang åstadkommas där så erfordras.

1.5 Elektromagnetisk kompatibilitet (EMC)
Produkten är konstruerad efter höga EMC-krav och data tillhandahålles i EMC datablad. Under extrema
betingelser skulle produkten kunna framkalla eller själv påverkas av störningar orsakade av
elektromagnetisk interaktion med annan utrustning. Installatören är ansvarig för att utrustningen eller
systemet uppfyller EMC-lagstiftningen i det land där den skall användas.
Inom Europeiska Unionen måste utrustning vari produkten införlivas uppfylla direktivet 89/336/EEC,
Elektromagnetisk kompatibilitet.

Nederlands
1 Belangrijke veiligheidsinformatie
Dit regelapparaat is bedoeld om professioneel toegepast te worden in een compleet systeem. Als de
installatie niet correct wordt uitgevoerd, kan dit gevaar opleveren. Het product gebruikt een hoge
spanning en hoge stromen, draagt een hoog niveau van opgeslagen elektrische lading en wordt
gebruikt om machinerieën te besturen, wat letsel kan opleveren. Om gevaar tijdens normaal
functioneren of tijdens storingen te vermijden, moet extra aandacht aan de elektrische installatie en het
systeemontwerp besteed worden. Systeemontwerp, installatie, inbedrijfname en onderhoud moeten
uitgevoerd worden door personeel dat voldoende vakkundige opleidingen en ervaring heeft. Deze
veiligheidsinformatie en de handleiding moeten zorgvuldig door hen gelezen worden.
1.1 Inbouw
Het regelapparaat moet ingebouwd worden in een schakelkast, zodat alleen opgeleid en bevoegd
personeel toegang heeft en vervuiling voorkomen wordt. Het regelapparaat is ontworpen voor gebruik
in een omgeving met vervuilingsgraad 2 volgens de norm IEC 60664-1. Dit betekent dat alleen droge
niet geleidende vervuiling is toegestaan.
1.2 Elektrische installatie

1.2.1 Algemene waarschuwing
De spanningsniveaus die in het regelapparaat gebruikt worden, kunnen hevige elektrische schokken
en/of brandwonden veroorzaken die dodelijk kunnen zijn. Voorzichtigheid is geboden als er met of in de
buurt van het regelapparaat gewerkt wordt. De installatie moet voldoen aan alle relevante
veiligheidsregels die gelden in het land van toepassing.
1.2.2 Isolatiemethode
Als servicewerkzaamheden anders dan wijzigingen in de instellingen of de parameters uitgevoerd
moeten worden, moet de AC-voeding afgeschakeld worden met behulp van een goedgekeurd
schakelmechanisme. Het regelapparaat bevat condensatoren die een dodelijk spanningsniveau
vasthouden nadat de voeding verwijderd is. Wacht nadat de voeding verwijderd is minstens 10 minuten
voordat werkzaamheden uitgevoerd worden die contact met elektrische aansluitingen van de regelaar
met zich meebrengen.
1.2.3 Producten aangesloten met een stekker
Als het regelapparaat wordt ingebouwd in een systeem dat met een stekker op de voeding is
aangesloten, kan gevaar ontstaan als de stekker losgekoppeld wordt. Indien de pinnen van de stekker
met de ingang van het regelapparaat in verbinding staan, wordt de verbinding met de aanwezige
condensatorlading door middel van een halfgeleider gescheiden. Om een elektrische schok van de
stekker te vermijden, indien toegankelijk, moet de stekker automatisch van de regelaar geïsoleerd
worden, bijvoorbeeld door middel van een magneet-schakelaar.
1.2.4 Stopfunctie
De stopfunctie van het regelapparaat verwijdert niet de gevaarlijke spanning van het regelapparaat en
randapparatuur en isoleert de motor niet van gevaarlijke spanningen.
1.2.5 Aarden (potentiaalvereffening)
Behalve bij compleet geïsoleerde producten waarbij geen aardverbinding is voorzien, moet het
regelapparaat geaard worden door een geleider die indien noodzakelijk de te verwachten foutstroom
kan geleiden. De aardverbindingen moeten voorzien worden zoals omschreven in de handleiding.
1.2.6 Zekeringen
Zekeringen of overstroombeveiliging moeten in de AC voeding voorzien worden volgens de instructies
in de handleiding. Het niet zorgvuldig volgen van de instructies kan brand veroorzaken.

1.2.7 Overstroombeveiliging
De regelaar heeft mogelijkheden om de motorstroom te begrenzen en de voeding te verwijderen in
geval van een extreme motortemperatuur. Deze functies moeten correct ingesteld worden om het risico
van motoroververhitting in geval van mechanische overbelasting of elektrische fouten te vermijden.
1.2.8 Isolatie controleaansluitingen
De controleaansluitingen zijn in de regelaar enkel door quasi potentiaalscheiding geïsoleerd van de
voedingscircuits. De installateur moet er zorg voor dragen dat de externe stuurstroomketen geïsoleerd
is voor menselijk contact door minstens één isolatielaag die gebruikt mag worden bij de AC-
voedingsspanning.
Als de stuurstroomketen aangesloten moet worden op andere circuits die geclassificeerd zijn als Safety
Extra Low Voltage (SELV), bijvoorbeeld op een PC, moet een extra potentiaalscheiding opgenomen
worden om de SELV-classificatie te kunnen handhaven.
1.2.9 Isolatie van controleaansluitingen / Cheetah – Puma
De controleaansluitingen van deze regelaars zijn niet geïsoleerd van de hoofdstroomkringen en
zijn potentiaal voerend. De op de controleklemmen aangesloten bedrading moet behandeld
worden als netpotentiaal.
1.2.10 Isolatie van controleaansluitingen / Maestro servoregelaars
De controleaansluitingen van deze regelaars zijn niet geïsoleerd van de hoofdstroomkringen.
In de meeste applicaties wordt een scheidingstransformator gebruikt om de regelaar te voeden en de
negatieve klem van de DC-bus van de regelaar wordt met aarde verbonden. Op voorwaarde dat de
aardverbinding geschikt is om de te verwachten foutstroom te geleiden, kunnen de
bedieningsstroomketens aangesloten worden op andere geaarde ketens, zonder dat dit gevaar
oplevert. Als de negatieve DC-klem niet met aarde verbonden is, moeten de
bedieningsstroomketens als netpotentiaal behandeld worden.
1.2.11 Remweerstanden (waar toegepast)
De waarschuwingen zoals omschreven in de handleiding voor remweerstanden zijn essentieel om
brandgevaar te vermijden in het geval van onverwacht hoge remenergie of verlies van controle over de
remunit.
1.3 Instellen, inregelen en onderhoud

Het is essentieel wijzigingen in de instellingen van de regelaar grondig te overwegen. Afhankelijk van
de applicatie kan een wijziging invloed op de veiligheid hebben. Tegen onbewuste wijzigingen moeten
geschikte voorzorgsmaatregelen genomen worden.
Onderstaand vindt u een overzicht van specifieke instellingen waar extra aandacht aan besteed moet
worden. Dit is geen exclusieve lijst; andere instellingen kunnen gevolgen hebben voor de veiligheid in
specifieke applicaties.
Automatische start De regelaar kan onverwacht opstarten in deze modus.
Reset van parameters naar fabrieksinstellingen Afhankelijk van de applicatie kan dit onvoorzien of
gevaarlijk bedrijf veroorzaken.
Motorparameters Oververhitting en mogelijk brandgevaar kunnen het gevolg zijn van foute
instellingen.
Probeer geen interne reparaties uit te voeren.
Retourneer de defecte regelaar voor reparatie naar de leverancier.

1.4 Veiligheid van machines en veiligheidskritische
applicaties
Binnen de Europese Unie moeten alle machines waarin dit product is toegepast voldoen aan de richtlijn
97/37/EC, Safety of Machinery. De hardware en software van de regelaar zijn ontworpen en getest
volgens een hoge standaard en fouten zijn onwaarschijnlijk. Het niveau van integriteit dat geboden
wordt door de controlefuncties van de regelaar, bijvoorbeeld start/stop, vooruit/achteruit en maximale
snelheid, is echter niet voldoende om de regelaar te gebruiken in kritische applicaties zonder
toegevoegde onafhankelijke bescherming. Alle applicaties die door een slechte werking verwondingen
of de dood tot gevolg kunnen hebben, moeten onderdeel zijn van een risicobeoordeling. Waar nodig
moet verdere bescherming voorzien worden.
1.5 Elektromagnetische compatibiliteit (EMC)

Het product is ontworpen volgens de hoge standaard van EMC en de gegevens zijn opgenomen in het
EMC datablad. Het product kan onder extreme omstandigheden storing veroorzaken of hierdoor
beïnvloed worden als gevolg van elektromagnetische wisselwerking met andere apparatuur. Het is de
verantwoordelijkheid van de installateur om ervoor te zorgen dat de apparatuur of het systeem waarin
het product opgenomen wordt, voldoet aan de geldende EMC-regels in het land van toepassing.
Binnen de Europese Unie moet apparatuur waarin het product is opgenomen voldoen aan de richtlijn
89/336/EEC, Elektromagnetische compatibiliteit.

中文
1 重要安全信息
此种变频器产品准拟以专业方式安装于完整设备或系统之中。倘安装不当，则可能出现安全隐
患。本产品采用高压及大电流，并储存大量电能。若用于控制可能导致伤害事故的机械设备 ,
无论正常运行或设备故障，电气安装及系统设计时均需保持高度谨慎以防事故。系统设计、安
装、调试及维护人员必须具备必要的培训及经验，且必须仔细阅读此安全信息及指导手册。
1.1 柜体
本变频器需安装于柜体内以防止未经过培训及未经过认证人员接触设备 , 并防止污染物进入。
其预期使用环境污染级别为 2 （据 IEC60664-1），亦即仅接受干燥、非导电性污染物。
1.2 电气安装
1.2.1 一般警告
本设备所带电压可导致严重电击及 / 或灼伤，具致命危险。操作或接近本设备时需始终保持极
度谨慎。
设备安装必须符合所在国家的所有相关安全法规。
1.2.2 隔离装置
执行任何维修工作之前，除调整本手册指定的设定值及参数外，必须采用合格隔离装置切断变
频器交流电源。切断电源后，变频器内的电容器仍储存电能，其电压具备潜在致命危险。若所
执行的工作可能接触到变频器电气接头，须在切断电源后应至少等待 10 分钟。
1.2.3 产品以插头及插座连接
若安装变频器的产品以插头及插座与电源相连，则可能存在特殊安全隐患。变频器交流电源端
子通过整流二极管与内置电容器连接，整流二极管并未安全绝缘。插头从插座中拔出时若插头
端子可触摸，则须以自动方式（如自锁接触器）隔离插头及变频器 , 以避免任何电击危险。
1.2.4 停止功能（STOP）
变频器停止功能不能清除变频器或任何外部选件上的危险电压，亦不能将电机与危险电压隔
离。
1.2.5 接地（接地，等电位连接）
除已完全隔离、无接地线的产品外，变频器必须接地，发生故障时，其接地导线应足以传输预
期故障电流。本手册所示接地连接必须遵循。
1.2.6 熔丝
必须依据本手册指导，在变频器输入端安装熔丝或过流保护装置。若未充分遵循本手册指导，
则可能导致火灾危险。
1.2.7 过流保护装置
若电机温度过高，变频器中有装置可限制电机电流并切断电源。此类功能必须正确设定，以免
在机械性过载或发生电气故障时出现电机过热危险。
1.2.8 控制电路隔离
驱动器的控制回路和电源回路仅采用基本绝缘的方法隔离。安装人员必须确保外部控制电路与
人体绝缘，交流电源电压至少有一层绝缘层。若控制电路需与其它安全特低电压（SELV）电路
相连（例如个人计算机），则必须采用额外绝缘屏障，藉此保持安全低电压。
1.2.9 控制电路隔离——Cheetah, Puma
此类变频器的控制电路未与电源电路隔离，在任何情况下其控制电路务必视为与交流电源同电位。

Issue Number: 5 www.controltechniques.com Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1
1.2.10 控制电路隔离——Maestro 系列直流伺服变频器
此类变频器的控制电路未与电源电路隔离。在多数应用场合中，此类变频器通过一个隔离变压
器供电，且其直流电源电路的负极端子接地。若其接地线足以传输预期的电源故障电流，则控
制电路可安全接至其它接地电路。若直流负极端子未接地，则其控制电路务必视为与交流电源
同电位。
1.2.11 制动电阻器（如适用）
用户指南中所述关于制动电阻器的防范措施在出现意外高制动能量或制动电路失控时可有效避
免火灾危险。
1.3 设定、调试及维护
改变变频器设定值须经周详考虑。改变设定值因应用场合不同可能对安全性产生不同影响，必
须采取适当措施以防无意修改或擅自改动。
以下所列为需格外注意的特殊设定值，但所列设定值并非面面俱到，其它设定值在特定场合中
亦可能对安全性产生一定影响。
自动启动变频器在此种模式下可能意外启动。
保存缺省参数设定此种设定可能导致不可知的运行或危险运行，视应用场合而定。
电机参数严重错误的设定值可能导致过热及火灾危险。请勿试图对变频器内部进行修理，而应
将有故障的变频器送交供应商修理。
1.4 机械安全及安全至上的应用场合
在欧盟内部，所有采用本产品的机械必须符合机械安全指导 97/37/EC。
变频器硬件及软件均依据高标准设计并测试，发生故障的可能性极低。若不采取额外的独立保
护措施，无论变频器控制功能的完整性如何（例如停止 / 启动、正向 / 反向及最大转速），均
不足以应用于安全至上应用场合。若故障可导致人身伤害或死亡，则所有此类应用场合必须接
受危险评估，且如有需要，应采取进一步保护措施。
1.5 电磁兼容性（EMC）

本产品依据高电磁兼容性标准设计，其数据请参阅电磁兼容性数据表，在极端条件下，由于与
其它设备间的相互电磁作用，本产品可能导致或遭遇电磁干扰。安装人员有责任确保安装本产
品的设备或系统符合所在国家电磁兼容性相关法规。在欧盟内部，安装本产品的设备必须符合
89/336/EEC 电磁兼容性标准。

0175-7051-05

5500225X 1 ENG 2007-05 Cont-Tech Unidrive SP

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

5500225X 1 ENG 2007-05 Cont-Tech Unidrive SP

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

EF

Short Form Guide

Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1

Copyright © May 2007 Control Techniques Drives Limited

1 Safety Information ....................................................................................... 5

4 Electrical Installation ................................................................................ 13

7 Running the motor .................................................................................... 32

11 UL Listing Information ............................................................................ 349

Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 Unidrive SP Short Form Guide

A Warning contains information which is essential for avoiding a safety hazard.

Electrical safety - general warning

System design and safety of personnel

Unidrive SP Short Form Guide Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 5

used in a safety-related application. The system designer is responsible for

Compliance with regulations

6 Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 Unidrive SP Short Form Guide

Input voltage Input No. of Typical input

Approvals label (Size 1 to 6)

Ser No: 3000005001 Made In U.K

Power stage label (Size 5 and 6 only)

Input Heavy Duty / No. of phases &

Current rating step

See section 10.2 on page 288 for location of rating labels.

Unidrive SP Short Form Guide Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 7

Keypad 15-way D-type

SM-Resolver SM-I/O Plus

* Part supplied with drive.

8 Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 Unidrive SP Short Form Guide

Table 2-1 Parts supplied with the drive

Unidrive SP Short Form Guide Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 9

Competence of the installer

The weights of the size 4, 5 and 6 drives are as follows:

3.1 Mounting methods

10 Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 Unidrive SP Short Form Guide

Ensure minimum clearances

The external EMC filter can be

Unidrive SP Short Form Guide Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 11

3.3 EMC filters

12 Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 Unidrive SP Short Form Guide

SECURE DISABLE function

Permanent magnet motors

Unidrive SP Short Form Guide Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 13

See section 10.1 on page 283.

14 Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 Unidrive SP Short Form Guide

4.3 Encoder connections

Unidrive SP Short Form Guide Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 15

the encoder operation from electrical noise.

16 Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 Unidrive SP Short Form Guide

4.6 Control connections

Analog input 3 8 Analog input 3

Reset 25 Digital I/O 2

Unidrive SP Short Form Guide Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 17

Stop/reset (red) button Stop/reset (red) button

Figure 5-3 SP0 Keypad

Lower display Navigation keys

Start (green) button Mode (black) button

SM-Keypad / SP0 Keypad SM-Keypad Plus

18 Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 Unidrive SP Short Form Guide

5.2 Keypad operation

Unidrive SP Short Form Guide Maillefer Doc. 550 0225X.1 19

Figure 5-5 Mode examples

Menu 5. Parameter 5 Drive status = tripped

5.4 Menu structure